Instrument Manual
The software contained in this product uses several valuable open source software packages. For information, see the "Open
Source Acknowledgment" on the user documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery).
Rohde & Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing.
The following abbreviations are used in this manual: R&S®xyz is abbreviated to R&S xyz.
Quality management Certified Quality System
ISO 9001
and environmental Certified Environmental System
1171020011
1171.0200.22-06.00
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions
Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
devices and electronic devices
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network, or if the power
switch is not suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product
from the AC supply network. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and
accessible at all times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the
connecting cable must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing
disconnection from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into
racks or systems, the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that apply
in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 5
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 6
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 7
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 8
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 9
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 10
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión Ueff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 11
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados Slos llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)S. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagnética (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analogía con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles
perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 12
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 13
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 14
R&S®TCE901 Contents
Contents
1 Safety Instructions...............................................................................11
1.1 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment................................ 11
1.2 General Safety Instructions....................................................................................... 12
1.2.1 Basic Safety Instructions...............................................................................................12
1.3 Special Hazard Information........................................................................................19
1.3.1 Hazards from Mains Voltage.........................................................................................19
1.3.1.1 Mains Power Supply..................................................................................................... 19
1.3.1.2 Changing Fuses............................................................................................................ 19
1.3.2 Hazards from High‑Energy Electric Circuits.................................................................. 19
1.3.3 Hazards from RF Radiation...........................................................................................20
1.3.3.1 Obligation to Instruct Personnel.................................................................................... 20
1.3.3.2 RF Shielding..................................................................................................................20
1.3.3.3 Rules When Operating an Amplifier..............................................................................20
1.3.3.4 Rules When Working on an Open Amplifier..................................................................21
Annex.................................................................................................. 351
1 Safety Instructions
on working with hazardous products (coolant) must be observed; see the section
"Material Safety Data Sheets" under "EC Safety Data Sheet – Antifrogen".
It is essential to read and observe the following instructions and safety informa-
tion.
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort
to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the
highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment that they
require are manufactured and tested in line with the applicable safety standards. Com-
pliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our Quality Assurance
department. The product described here has been manufactured and tested in accord-
ance with the enclosed EC Certificate of Conformity and left the manufacturer's plant in
a condition fully complying with the relevant safety standards. To maintain this condi-
tion and to ensure safe operation, you must observe all information, warnings and
instructions provided in this manual. Please do not hesitate to contact the
Rohde & Schwarz group of companies if you have any queries regarding these safety
instructions.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This
product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if
expressly permitted, also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause
personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used for any
purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any consequences resulting from
the product being used for purposes other than those for which it is intended.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its prod-
uct documentation and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation
and the following safety instructions). Using the product requires technical skills and a
basic knowledge of English. It must therefore be ensured that only skilled and special-
ized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills are allowed to use the
product. If personal protective equipment is required for using Rohde & Schwarz prod-
ucts, this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep
the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass
them on to other users of the product.
Observance of the safety instructions is intended to prevent injury or damage resulting
from hazards of all types. To this end, persons who are to use the product must care-
fully read and fully understand the following safety instructions prior to and during use
of the product. It is also essential to observe all other safety instructions (e.g. relating
to personnel protection) which are given at appropriate points in the product documen-
tation. In these safety instructions, the term "product" refers to all articles sold and dis-
tributed by the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies; these include instruments, sys-
tems and all accessory items.
indicates an immediate high-risk hazard which will result in death or serious injury if it
is not avoided.
indicates a potential medium-risk hazard which can result in death or (serious) injury if
it is not avoided.
indicates a low-risk hazard which could result in minor or moderate injury if it is not
avoided.
indicates possible incorrect operation which could result in damage to the product.
These signal words correspond to the standard definitions for civil applications in the
European Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may
also exist in other economic areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to
make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection
with the related product documentation and the related product. The use of signal
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz
products:
a) Operating position: housing base at bottom
b) IP degree of protection: 2X
c) Degree of fouling: 2
d) Overvoltage category: 2
e) For indoor use only
f) Operation up to 2000 m above sea level
g) Transport up to 4500 m above sea level
h) Tolerance for nominal voltage: ±10 %
i) Tolerance for nominal frequency: ±5 %
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, shelves or tables that for reasons
of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or
structures (e.g. walls and shelves). Installing the product in a manner that does not
comply with the product documentation could result in personal injury or even
death.
3. Do not place the product on heat‑generating devices (e.g. radiators or fan heaters).
The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in
the product documentation or in the data sheet. Product overheating can cause
electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or even death.
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent neces-
sary, electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or even death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage set on the
product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply. If a different voltage is to
be set, the mains fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products with degree of protection I with movable power feed line
and connector, operation is permitted only at sockets with protective conductor
contact and connected protective conductor.
3. Intentional interruption of the protective conductor either along the feed line or in
the product itself is not permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric
shock from the product. If extension cables or multipoint connectors are used, they
must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use.
4. If the product does not have a mains switch for disconnecting the product from the
power supply, the plug attached to the connecting cable must be used as a discon-
nect device. In such cases, it must be ensured that the power plug is within easy
reach and accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m). Func-
tional switches or electronic switches are not suitable for disconnecting the product
from the power supply. If products without mains switches are integrated in racks
or systems, a disconnect device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cable on a
regular basis to ensure that it is in proper operating condition. Take appropriate
safety measures and lay the power cable carefully to ensure that the cable will not
be damaged and that no one can be hurt by, for example, suffering an electric
shock or tripping over the cable.
6. Operation is only permitted in TN/TT supply networks which are fuse-protected with
max. 16 A (higher fuse ratings should only be used after consultation with the
Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and
completely into the socket provided. Disregard of these points can lead to sparks,
fire and/or injury.
8. Do not overload the sockets, extension cables or multipoint connectors as this can
cause fire or electric shocks.
9. For measurements in electric circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures
(e.g. appropriate measuring equipment, fusing, current limiting, electrical separa-
tion, insulation) must be taken to avoid any hazards.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing
while the product is in operation. Doing so would expose electrical lines and com-
ponents and could lead to injuries, fire or damage to the product.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built‑in fuses, circuit breakers or simi-
lar protective devices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that anyone
who has access to the product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protec-
ted from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that
caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise the person operat-
ing the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock.
15. Do not insert foreign objects into the housing openings. Doing so can cause short
circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless otherwise specified, products are not protected against the penetration of
fluids; see also the section "Operating conditions, operating positions and operat-
ing locations", item 1. The instruments must therefore be protected against the
penetration of fluids. Failure to observe this point may result in the user suffering
an electric shock or the product being damaged, which in turn can endanger per-
sonnel.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can
form in or on the product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm
environment. Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply
(e.g. mains or battery). Clean instruments using a damp, soft, lint-free paper towel
or cotton cloth. Warm water or a mild cleaner (good results have been achieved
using glass cleaner (Mat. No. 0041.5336.00)) is recommended as a cleaning
agent. If any other cleaning agent is to be used, it must be checked beforehand
whether the cleaning agent is compatible with the surface to be cleaned.
Operation
1. Operating the product requires special training and intense concentration. It must
be ensured that persons who operate the product are fit to do so from a physical,
intellectual and mental viewpoint, otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage. It is
the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable personnel for operat-
ing the product.
2. Before moving or transporting the product, read and observe the information in the
section "Transport" on page 18.
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, it is not possible to completely rule out
the use of materials which cause allergies, i.e. "allergens" (e.g. nickel). If, when
using Rohde & Schwarz products, allergic reactions occur (e.g. skin rash, frequent
sneezing, red eyes or respiratory problems), consult a doctor immediately in order
to determine the cause and to prevent health problems.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio systems can pro-
duce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation. In order to protect unborn life,
pregnant women must be protected by means of suitable measures. Electromag-
netic radiation also poses a risk to persons with pacemakers. The employer/opera-
tor is obliged to assess and identify workplaces where there is a particular risk of
exposure to radiation, and to take precautions to prevent potential hazards.
6. In the event of fire, toxic substances (gases, fluids, etc.) can be discharged from
the product and damage the health of personnel. If a fire occurs, appropriate meas-
ures must therefore be taken (e.g. breathing masks and protective clothing).
7. If a laser product is integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product (e.g. CD/DVD drive),
no settings or functions other than those described in the product documentation
should be used in order to prevent injury (e.g. from the laser beam).
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before
any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be
disconnected from the supply voltage, otherwise there is a risk of electric shock.
2. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight
must be avoided. Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled terminals
using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells and batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be
stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short‑circuit each other, or where
they can be short‑circuited by other conductive materials. A cell or battery should
only be taken out of its original packaging when it is to be used.
4. Keep cells and batteries out of the reach of children. If a cell or battery has been
swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately.
5. Cells and batteries must not be subjected to severe mechanical jolts or impacts.
6. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not come into contact with the skin or eyes.
If contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical
assistance.
remains safe to use, always replace cells or batteries with the appropriate
Rohde & Schwarz type (see the replacement parts list).
8. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Accu-
mulators and batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium must be disposed of
as hazardous waste. Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal
and recycling.
Transport
1. The product may be extremely heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with
care. In some cases, the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the
product (e.g. with a lift truck) to avoid back or other physical injuries.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the responsibility of the driver to drive the
vehicle in a safe and appropriate manner. The manufacturer shall not accept liabil-
ity for accidents or collisions. Never use the product in a moving vehicle if there is a
risk that this could distract the vehicle driver. Make sure that the product is ade-
quately secured in order to prevent injury or other damage in the event of an acci-
dent.
Disposal
2. If, when handling the product, hazardous materials or operating fluids are encoun-
tered which must be disposed of separately (e.g. coolant or engine oils that have to
be changed at regular intervals), the safety instructions from the manufacturer of
these hazardous materials and operating fluids, and the applicable local disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe any additional relevant safety instruc-
tions in the product documentation. Incorrect disposal of hazardous materials or
operating fluids can result in damage to health and the environment.
● Before connecting the mains power supply, it is important to ensure that the power
supply specifications given for the system or individual instruments match the nom-
inal specifications for the local power supply network. The power supply circuit
must always be provided with sufficient fuse protection to ensure that overloads
and short circuits are prevented.
● Miniature modules have neutral conductor fuses. As a result, voltage may still be
present even if the electric circuit has been interrupted by a fuse.
● Instrument fuses which are accessible to the user may only be changed when the
instruments are in a de‑energized state. They must always be replaced with fuses
that have the same electrical rating, tripping characteristics and breaking capacity.
● Circuit breakers and miniature circuit breakers in areas of a transmitter system
which are accessible to the user must be triggered. If their response range is
adjustable, the ex‑factory setting must not be altered. If settings are changed inad-
vertently, the correct values specified in this documentation must be set.
The instruments contain low-voltage circuits that can be fed from a voltage source with
an extremely low impedance (e.g. amplifier operating voltage). These circuits carry
dangerously high levels of energy. At Rohde & Schwarz, we treat these circuits in the
same way as circuits with hazardous contact voltages. Normally, these circuits are pro-
tected by covers to prevent unintentional contact. An appropriate warning label is
attached to the cover.
In practice it has been repeatedly shown that short circuits caused by small metallic
tools result in severe burns. For safety reasons, any high‑energy electric circuits in
areas of the equipment that can be accessed by users are concealed by protective
covers.
● The operator must train all personnel in the operation of this transmitter or instru-
ment in line with EN 60215 and/or IEC 215. It is essential that these regular train-
ing sessions emphasize the dangers related to high frequency that exist at the
respective transmitter or instrument. Operating personnel are only authorized to
adjust and operate the equipment after they have completed the respective training
sessions and their participation has been documented.
High‑energy RF circuits inside the transmitter or instrument are routed via conventional
removable RF connectors (e.g. type N). Depending on the output power, the output
ports of the transmitter and instrument are equipped with screw-type or plug-in RF
lines or ducts.
If RF lines or modules carry high power, the connection point or the entire module is
tagged with the general danger warning label (yellow triangle with a black exclamation
mark).
1.3.3.2 RF Shielding
Transmitters and instruments from Rohde & Schwarz are shielded so that even in the
immediate vicinity there is no danger from RF radiation when all RF lines are connec-
ted. This applies to statutory provisions in Germany, i.e. the regulation concerning
electromagnetic fields:
Limits for electrical and magnetic field strengths of high‑frequency installations are
defined in the 26th ordinance of the German Federal Government's Emission Control
Act of December 16, 1996 (26. BImSchV).
Disconnecting RF lines that are in operation can result in arcs. These can cause burns
and eye injuries.
● Operation of the amplifier is only permitted if a main or dummy antenna is connec-
ted.
● Never disconnect RF lines when the amplifier is in operation.
Operation with RF power is not permitted if the instrument has been opened or covers
have been removed.
In its basic configuration, the R&S TCE901 is an exciter. Its functionality can be exten-
ded by the addition of various plug‑in modules.
This manual only describes the functions of the R&S TCE901 exciter.
1 = DVB‑S/S2 receiver
2 = Mini LAN switch
3 = Air cooling interface (ACIF)
4 = Power feed with fuses
5 = Base unit interfaces
Depending on the hardware installed, this module provides the following exciter func-
tions:
● External (customer) interfaces
● Video input signal processing
● Channel coding
● Generation of a modulated OFDM signal
● Generation of a RF signal
● Reference and sync signal processing
● Regulation of the output stage output power
● Digital linear precorrection and nonlinear output stage precorrection
● Monitoring of the power supply unit
● Monitoring of the redundancy circuit
● Hardware:
2x ASI input, 2x TSoIP input, GPS and OCXO reference oscillator
2.2.3 Backplane
This module forms the interface for communication between the various modules.
The 12 V power supply unit provides the internal voltage supply for the instrument.
2.2.5 Fans
The DVB‑T/T2 receiver is used to receive and modulate DVB‑T and DVB‑T2. The mod-
ule supplies an MPEG transport stream (ASI) and a number of measured values
(RF power, MER, BER, packet error, etc.) and is controlled via USB. The receiver cov-
ers the entire VHF and UHF frequency range.
A reference frequency is required for operation of the module.
The sat receiver is used to receive and modulate one or two DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 sig-
nals. It decodes the RF signals present at RF IN 1 and/or RF IN 2 to an MPEG trans-
port stream that is forwarded internally via the backplane to the coder board. The
transport stream can be output via ASI OUT or TS LAN OUT.
If the sat receiver is operated with the following software options, these options must
be activated using the corresponding option key.
● TCE900K55 DVB S/S2 RX IP Output (2500.3813.02)
● TCE900K56 DVB S/S2 RX Decryption (2500.3820.02)
With a medium‑power transmitter, the air cooling interface forms the connection
between the exhaust‑air kit and the transmitter control unit. This can be used to control
2 fans independently of each other using a 0 V to 10 V voltage signal. At the same
time, 2 speed signals from the fans can be evaluated to determine their speed.
Two differential pressure sensors measure the pressure in the rack in relation to the air
pressure outside the rack and regulate (by means of the ACIF in the TCE) the speed of
the two exhaust fans with the aim of reaching normal pressure in the closed rack.
Two examples of regulation to ensure normal pressure in the rack:
● If the temperature of the intake air to the transmitter rises, the speed of the ampli-
fier fans, for example, increases so that the amplifier continues to be cooled relia-
bly. The air pressure in the rack rises as a result and the ACIF increases the speed
of the two exhaust fans of the exhaust‑air kit.
● If the temperature of the intake air to the transmitter drops, the speed of the ampli-
fier fans is reduced, the pressure in the rack decreases and the speed of the
exhaust fans of the exhaust‑air kit is also reduced.
A fallback speed is set during initial startup. This default fan speed ensures that the
exhaust air from the transmitter continues to be removed reliably if the ACIF fails.
If there is a power failure or the ACIF fails, the control voltage is derived from the volt-
age provided by one of the fans, thus keeping the control voltage intact. The most
recently saved fan speed is set via an EEPROM potentiometer even in the event of
failure of the power supply to the ACIF and fans and subsequent failure of the ACIF.
Analog pressure sensors can be connected via 2 pressure measuring points (the mea-
suring points must function according to the 4 mA to 20 mA measurement procedure).
The pressure sensors in use are bidirectional and measure the pressure difference
inside and outside of the rack. This allows a pressure‑neutral environment to be set up
in the rack using the fans.
States can be monitored using 4 digital inputs. Two relays can be switched on and off
to switch external components; the state of the relay contacts is monitored for each
relay.
The air cooling interface is connected to the R&S TCE901 via a USB port on the back-
plane. In addition to this, interrupt lines are also provided, which run as a signal line
(IRQSCB_OX, GPIO_OPTX_3) from the air cooling interface to the SCB/IPS1/2 and
run as feedback lines (GPIO_OPTX_4, F0_1PPSSCB_OX) from the IPS1/2/SCB to the
air cooling interface.
The plug position of the air cooling interface in the R&S TCE901 can be determined via
USB using SLOT_IDX.
The CIF (cooling interface) is designed to control two independent cooling circuits and
fulfills the following functions:
● Activation of up to 4 pumps and 8 fans in a liquid cooling system
● Activation of up to 4 temperature measuring points for monitoring the coolant tem-
perature
● Activation of analog pressure sensors
● Activation of an external station cooling system
● Activation of an xx8000 cooling system ZK8x0
The CIF is connected to the backplane via the X2 port (90‑pin Airmax connector).
JTAG interface X1 is intended for diagnostic purposes.
Ports X3 and X4 (both D-Sub, 15‑pin) for connecting to the cooling system are on the
rear panel. Pins for the following interfaces are also provided:
● Two independent RS485 interfaces (one at X3 and one at X4)
● Connection to the CAN bus (only at X3)
● Analog or digital inputs for measuring pressure and temperature and for activating
an external station cooling system (distributed over X3 and X4)
The R&S miniCIF (mini cooling interface) is used as the interface between the
R&S TCE901 and the transmitter cooling circuit. The miniCIF is responsible for evalu-
ating temperature sensors, the speed signals from fans, digital input signals and a
pressure sensor. It also provides speed control for 2 pumps as well as a floating relay
contact. The module is an extension of the TCE901 and can be installed in a slot inside
the TCE901.
The mini LAN switch provides 4 additional Ethernet ports for internal transmitter
cabling with N+1/MultiTX transmitter systems. Two LEDs at each port indicate the sta-
tus.
● Connection/activity (green LED)
● Valid Gigabit Ethernet connection (yellow LED)
The LAN switch provides 8 additional Ethernet ports for internal transmitter cabling with
N+1/MultiTX transmitter systems. Two LEDs at each port indicate the status.
● Connection/activity (green LED)
● Valid Gigabit Ethernet connection (yellow LED)
In its basic version, the R&S TCE901 can communicate with up to 2 output stage
racks. The Output STage InterFace (OST‑IF) sets up communication with the amplifi-
ers in up to 2 further output stage racks. Up to 2 output stage interfaces can be instal-
led in one TCE901, thereby enabling communication with up to 6 output stage racks.
This module provides a 12 V backup power supply for the exciter module in order to
prevent rebooting when voltage dips occur.
The various versions of the TCE900/901 are already integrated into the rack with the
delivery of a transmitter. Installation is limited to wiring at the device's customer interfa-
ces. Which cables need to be connected depends on the transmitter configuration, the
device version and the custom requirements.
In the case of replacement or the installation of new equipment, the instrument must
additionally be installed in the transmitter and the cables inside the transmitter then
connected.
The procedure for connecting the cables of a R&S TCE900/901 is described from
Chapter 3.1, "Moving R&S TCE900/901 to Unwiring Position", on page 37.
If the system is equipped with a TDU901 display unit, the following points must be
observed:
● The TDU901 display unit is removed prior to shipping
● The display must be attached again after the transmitter has been installed. How to
attach the display is described under Chapter 3.5, "Attaching TDU901 Display",
on page 39
2. Using a No. 20 Torx screwdriver, unscrew the 6 captive Torx screws on the front
panel of the TCE installation box and remove the front panel.
Note: The front panel is curved around the crossbeam at the top and has cutouts
for lifting lugs on the left and right.
3. Push the cover plate upward as far as it will go.
Both locking hooks are now free in the cutouts.
5. On the transmitter roof, unscrew the upper knurled screws for the desired module.
6. Push the module upward out of the transmitter roof and engage the module at the
unwiring position.
The interfaces of the R&S TCE900/901 are now easily accessible.
1. Move the module of the TCE900/901 Exc to the unwiring position (see Chapter 3.1,
"Moving R&S TCE900/901 to Unwiring Position", on page 37).
4. Lower the module back to its normal position in the TCE installation box.
3.2.2 FM (Band 2)
2. Connect the modulation signals (L, R, MPX, AES, Pilot) and the FM audio splitter.
The FM audio splitter is connected to the R&S TCE900/901 via X20 of the FM
coder.
1. Move the module of the TCE900 SysCtrl to the unwiring position (see Chapter 3.1,
"Moving R&S TCE900/901 to Unwiring Position", on page 37).
2. For remote connection via Ethernet, connect the X2 interface (1000BASE-T) to the
IP network.
3. Lower the module back to its normal position in the TCE installation box.
1. Insert the locking hooks of the cover plate into the cutouts of the TCE installation
box and press the cover plate onto the installation box.
2. Fit the front panel and screw in the 6 Torx screws tightly.
1 = Knurled screw
1 = Holder
2 = Display
3 = Mini USB port
4 = Threaded insert for knurled screw
5 = Fastening hole
3. Adjust the angle of the display and fix the display in position using the two knurled
screws on the right and left.
The structure of the transmitter system is configured in the "Basic Setup" menu. Each
R&S TCE900/R&S TCE901/R&S TLU9 is assigned its logical function together with
other instruments and the physical installation position of the individual instruments is
set.
The basic settings are made for each R&S TCE900/R&S TCE901/R&S TLU9 in the
system and must be entered in the specified sequence:
● Hardware equipment ("Boards" menu tab)
The hardware modules which each instrument contains and the position at which
these modules are inserted in the base unit must be configured for each instru-
ment.
● Definition of the logical function
The task that each instrument is to fulfill in the system must be defined.
● Integration of the individual instruments in the transmitter system
Depending on their function, some instruments require additional information
regarding:
– system variant (MultiTX, N+1)
– transmitter variant (Redundancy, Modulation, Amplifier Type)
– assignment to a transmitter (TX Number, Exciter A/B)
● Physical structure of the transmitter system
Depending on their function, some instruments require additional information
regarding:
– total number of transmitter racks
– number of racks per transmitter
● Physical installation location of the instrument
Each instrument must be assigned the following:
– number of the rack in which they are installed
– number of the extension slot within a rack
● Assignment of transmitters to racks ("Racks" menu tab)
Each instrument with the "Rack Control" function must be assigned those transmit-
ters which are installed in the racks which the "Rack Control" function monitors.
Changes to the basic settings only become effective when the instrument has been
rebooted.
In the tables below, "?" means that it must be taken into consideration whether an air
cooling interface (ACIF) or a TX interface is installed. See the detailed description of
the "Cooling Control" and "Rack Control" parameters in the table "Description of set-
ting values" below.
Transmitter type System Con- TX Control Exciter Cooling Control Rack Control 1
trol
Exciter X X X ? ?
Exciter - X X ? ?
Backup Drive
Exciter A X X X ? ?
Exciter B - X X - -
Dual Drive
System Control X - - ? ?
Exciter A - X X - -
Exciter B - X X - -
Transmitter type System Con- TX Control Exciter Cooling Control Rack Control 2
trol
Single Drive
System Control X - - ? X
Dual Drive
System Control X - - ? X
Transmitter type System Con- TX Control Exciter Cooling Control Rack Control
trol
TX A - X X - -
TX B - X X - -
Transmitter type System Con- TX Control Exciter Cooling Control Rack Control
trol
Single Drive
TX B + System Control X X X ? ?
Dual Drive
TX B + System Control X X X ? ?
Transmitter type System Con- TX Control Exciter Cooling Control Rack Control
trol
Single Drive
System Control X - - ? X
Dual Drive
System Control X - - ? X
Single Drive
Backup Drive
Dual Drive
Single Drive
Dual Drive
TX A - A1 - Backup TX -
TX B - B - Backup TX -
Single Drive
Dual Drive
Single Drive
Dual Drive
Exciter 192.168.58.100
Backup Drive
Exciter A 192.168.58.11
Exciter B 192.168.58.12
Dual Drive
Exciter A 192.168.58.11
Exciter B 192.168.58.12
Single Drive
Dual Drive
TX A 192.168.58.11
TX B 192.168.58.12
Table 4-14: IP addresses for N+1 and Compact n+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB <n> = 9; <m> = 2 to 9, No. of Rack Controls)
Single Drive
Dual Drive
System Control Set this check mark if this instrument is to function as a system con- Disabled, Configuration No
trol unit. In this case, all remote interfaces and, if installed, the dis- Enabled
play must be connected to this instrument. This instrument can also
perform the function of the N+1 automatic switchover system.
Depending on which modules are installed, this instrument can be
assigned further functions, e.g. those of a cooling control unit.
TX Control Set this check mark if this instrument is to function as a transmitter Disabled, Configuration No
control unit. The transmitter control unit contains, for example, the Enabled
function for monitoring the output power and an automatic exciter
switchover function (optional). In addition to functioning as a trans-
mitter control unit, this instrument can be assigned further functions
depending on the modules it contains. In addition to the "TX Control"
function, the "Exciter" function must also always be activated.
Exciter Set this check mark if this instrument contains the signal processing Disabled, Configuration No
function. In most applications, the "TX Control" function must addi- Enabled
tionally be activated, unless this instrument is to be operated as a
standalone instrument. In addition to functioning as an exciter, this
instrument can be assigned further functions depending on the mod-
ules it contains.
Cooling Control Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Disabled, Configuration No
Enabled
Set this check mark if this instrument contains at least one cooling
interface or one air cooling interface. In addition to functioning as a
cooling control unit, this instrument can be assigned more functions
depending on the modules it contains. The "Cooling Control" func-
tion must always be activated together with the "Rack Control" func-
tion.
Rack Control Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Disabled, Configuration No
Enabled
Set this check mark if this instrument is to monitor rack components,
e.g. overvoltage protection or door contacts. A "TX interface" mod-
ule must be installed for this purpose. With most system configura-
tions, the Rack Control function and the System Control function are
together on the same instrument. The only exception are multirack N
+1 systems in which more than one rack control are installed. With
liquid‑cooled transmitters, the "Rack Control" function must always
be activated together with the "Cooling Control" function.
With R&S TMU9 and R&S TMV9, the Rack Control function must be
activated if an air cooling interface is installed and the "Cooling"
function is activated.
Rack Number Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 18 Configuration No
Indicates the rack in which this instrument is installed. The left‑hand
rack is assigned the number 1.
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control", "TX Con-
trol" or "Exciter" function is active.
Slot Number Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 12 Configuration No
Indicates the position at which this instrument is installed in the
respective rack. In R&S THU9 and R&S THV9, position 1 is the left
slot; in R&S TMU9 and R&S TMV9, position 1 is the top slot.
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control", "TX Con-
trol" or "Exciter" function is active.
Function/Config Indicates whether the selected combination of settings is valid and OK, not Valid Read only -
nonconflicting.
Reboot Triggers rebooting of this instrument. Changes to settings in this and --- Configuration No
the other menu tabs of the Basic Config menu only become effective
after a reboot.
System Variant Indicates whether the system is a SingleTX, MultiTX or N+1 system. Single/ Configuration No
MultiTX, n+1
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is
active.
Transmitters Indicates how many transmitters the system contains. The B trans- 1 to 8 Configuration No
mitter of an N+1 system is not included here.
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is
active.
Exciter Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Exc A, Exc B Configuration No
Indicates whether this instrument is to operate as exciter A or
exciter B. The displayed value must correspond to the cabling of the
two exciters at the exciter switch. Exciter A is shown in the case of
single drive transmitters.
The setting can be changed here if the "Exciter" function is active.
Redundancy Indicates which redundancy method is supported by this transmitter. Single Drive, Configuration No
● Single Drive: Dual Drive,
The transmitter contains one exciter. Backup Drive
● Dual Drive:
The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active exciter fails,
an automatic switchover function switches the system over to
the standby exciter.
● Only available with some system variants: Backup Drive
The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active exciter fails,
an automatic switchover function switches the system over to
the standby exciter.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is
active.
Modulation Shows the modulation mode of the transmitter. An appropriate soft- DVB‑T2, Configuration No
ware option must additionally be installed for the displayed modula- DVB‑T,
tion mode. ISDB‑T,
ATSC, ATV,
Either the modulation modes for TV/DAB or those for FM are availa-
DAB, FM
ble.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or "Exciter"
function is active.
2nd Modulation Shows the alternative modulation mode of the transmitter. In addi- DVB‑T2, Configuration No
tion to the primary modulation mode, a software option for a further DVB‑T,
modulation mode must also be installed so that this setting value ISDB‑T,
becomes visible. Switching between the two modulation modes is ATSC, ATV,
performed in the "TX Overview" menu within the Device View. DAB, FM
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or "Exciter"
function is active.
Amplifier Mode Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901 Broadband, Configuration No
with modulation mode DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T, ATSC, DTMB, Doherty
ATV and DAB
Indicates whether the amplifiers are to be operated in broadband or
Doherty mode. To operate the amplifiers in Doherty mode, the fre-
quency ranges of the amplifiers must be set to the transmit fre-
quency. This display only applies to amplifier types which support
Doherty mode.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is
active.
Amplifier Type Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. PHU901, Configuration No
PMU901,
Shows the amplifier type used in the transmitter.
● PHU901: PHU902,
High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled PHU903,
● PMU901: PHV902,
Medium‑power amplifier, UHF, air‑cooled with Doherty mode PMV901,
● PHU902: PHR901,
High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled with Doherty mode PMR901
● PHU903:
High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled with Doherty mode
● PHV902:
High‑power amplifier, VHF, liquid‑cooled with Doherty mode
● PMV901:
Medium‑power amplifier, VHF, air‑cooled with Doherty mode
● PHR901:
High‑power amplifier, VHF, band II, liquid‑cooled
● PMR901:
Medium‑power amplifier, VHF, band II, liquid‑cooled
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or "Exciter"
function is active.
Amplifiers Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 48 Configuration No
Shows the total number of amplifiers in this transmitter. All amplifiers
in all racks are counted. Up to 48 amplifiers are supported (FM: up to
8 amplifiers).
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is
active.
Number of Rack Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 9 Configuration No
Controls Shows the total number of rack controls in the system. The system
control is counted provided that the Rack Control function is activa-
ted on the system control. The setting can be changed here if the
"System Control" function is active for this instrument.
Racks/Sys Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 18 Configuration No
Shows the total number of racks contained in the system.
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is
active.
Cooling Type Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Air, Liquid- Configuration No
ISC, Liquid
Shows the cooling system type.
● Air
For medium‑power transmitters of the TMx9 series
● Liquid-ISC
For high‑power transmitters of the THx9 series, with "integrated
small cooling" with basic monitoring of pumps and fans and
without flow control.
● Liquid
For high‑power transmitters of the THx9 series, for cooling sys-
tems with extended monitoring of pumps and fans and with flow
control.
The displayed value must be suitable for the amplifier type. Further
settings are made in the "Home" > "Cooling" > "Task View" > "Setup
Cooling" menu.
Racks/Rack Con- Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 4 Configuration No
trol Indicates how many racks are being monitored by this instrument.
Transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers monitor 2 to 4 racks with
one rack control. With all other transmitters, this value must be set to
1.
The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is
active.
Racks/TX Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 1 to 4 Configuration No
Indicates how many racks the transmitter consists of. Transmitters in
the "Active Reserve" configuration consist of either 2 or 4 racks.
Transmitters in a different configuration consist of 1 to 4 racks,
depending on the total number of amplifiers.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is
active.
Dummy Loads Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. No Loads, Configuration No
Switches/
Indicates whether the transmitter has a switchable dummy antenna at
shared,
its output.
● No Loads Switches/
The transmitters of this system do not have a switchable dummy multiple,
antenna. Patch Panel
● Switches/shared
The transmitters of this system share a common dummy
antenna. A maximum of one transmitter can be operated on the
dummy antenna at any one time.
● Switches/Multiple
Every transmitter of this system has its own dummy antenna.
Multiple transmitters can be operated on the dummy antenna
simultaneously.
● Patch Panel
The transmitters are switched only manually using a patch
panel.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is active
for this instrument. This function is not available in the "Active
Reserve" transmitter configuration.
ParIO Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Off, 32/80, Configuration No
9/12
Indicates whether remote control using parallel contacts is activated.
ParIO 32/80 corresponds to a parallel remote control interface card
with 32 inputs and 80 outputs. ParIO 9/12 corresponds to a parallel
remote control interface card with 9 inputs and 12 outputs. Remote
control can be connected to a system control function. In the case of
N+1 systems, it is also possible to connect remote control to a trans-
mitter control system, but certain restrictions will then apply.
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" or "TX Con-
trol" function is active.
Switchless Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Disabled, Configuration No
Combiner Enabled
Indicates whether the transmitter has a switchless combiner. The
switchless combiner combines the RF outputs of two racks. If there is
a difference in power between the racks, the switchless combiner
changes the phase angle of the racks in such a way that the output
power loss is minimized.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is active
and the value set for "Racks/TX" is greater than 1.
Half Antenna Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Disabled, Configuration No
Enabled
Indicates whether the transmitter has an automatic half-antenna
switchover function. The setting can be changed here.
Int. RF Sensor Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901 in Off, On Configuration No
combination with the PMx901 amplifier.
Indicates whether the internal RF test point of the amplifier is to be
used for measuring the transmit power.
The setting is only relevant for "Amplifier Type = PMx901". The value
"On" should be set if the transmitter consists of exactly one amplifier
and no CAN bus test point is installed in the transmitter.
The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" function is active.
Assign UPS Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Off, On Configuration No
Indicates whether this instrument can monitor an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). A UPS can be monitored by multiple instru-
ments at the same time. Ideally, monitoring should be performed by
all instruments that are battery‑buffered by the UPS. The setting can
be changed here.
UPS IP Address Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. 192.168.58.1 Configuration No
10 to
Shows the IP address of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The
192.168.58.1
IP address must be set at the UPS and also at the instruments that
39
are connected to the UPS. IP addresses in the range from
192.168.58.110 to 192.168.58.139 can be used for the UPS.
The displayed IP address can be changed here.
Assign TDU Indicates whether a TDU900 display is connected to this instrument. Yes, No Configuration No
If this check mark is set, the type plate of the TDU900 is displayed in
the Device Manager.
The setting can be changed here.
Assign TSP Indicates whether a transmitter status panel is connected to this Yes, No Configuration No
instrument via USB.
If this check mark is set, the type plate of the TDU900 is displayed in
the Device Manager.
The setting can be changed here.
Slot Config Used to determine which module is contained in each extension slot Depends on Configuration No
of the instrument. Some modules can be mounted in different installa- the used
tion slots. The possible installation positions are different for the vari- instrument
ous instrument types. type
The setting can be changed here.
Rack Selector Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Rack 1 to Query No
(left side) Rack 4
Selection element for displaying which transmitters are installed in the
selected rack. The number of racks available for selection is set under
"Primary Configuration -> Racks per Rack Control".
TX (right side) Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. TX A1 to TX Configuration No
A8, TX B
Indicates which transmitters are installed in the selected rack.
The setting can be changed here.
The menu is only available for the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901 and if
the "Rack Control" function is active for this instrument.
Table 4-20: Description of "Ethernet" setting values
IP Address Used to set the IP address of the instrument for internal communica- Configuration No
(Local IP Set- tion with other instruments in this system. When the system is deliv-
tings) ered, the internal IP addresses begin with 192.168.58. and the last
group of digits differs according to the following rule:
● System Control: 100
● TX Control + Exciter: 11/12 (= TXA1, Exciter A/B) to 81/82 (=
TXA8, Exciter A/B); 91/92 (= TXB, Exciter A/B)
● Rack Control (second rack): 101
The setting can be changed here.
IP Address Used to set the IP address of the instrument. The settings depend on Configuration No
(Remote IP Set- the network infrastructure.
tings)
The cooling system is configured in two steps. First, the cooling type (air cooling or liq-
uid cooling) is set in the Task View (Home) > Basic Config > Primary Configuration
menu and the R&S TCE900/901 RackControl is rebooted. The cooling system is then
configured in the "Cooling" task. The task also contains a wizard that supports replace-
ment of defective pumps and fans.
In the case of a standard cooling system with one transmitter, one pump unit and one
heat exchanger, configuration is performed automatically. Manual configuration is only
required in the following cases:
● More than one rack
● More than one heat exchanger per rack
1. Make sure that no pumps or fans are connected to the mains distribution board
(MDB).
2. Press the following buttons: Task View > Setup Cooling > Scan Devices.
3. In the Scan Control field, set the Scan Device switch to "On".
4. Follow the dialog step by step by connecting one fan after the other and one pump
after the other in the specified sequence to the mains distribution board (MDB) on
the rear of the transmitter rack.
Note: The status of this process is signaled by the status display in the Scan Con-
trol field:
● off (gray) = Scan Devices is switched off.
● In progress (yellow) = configuration is running.
● Finished (green) = configuration has been successfully completed; all displays
in the Rack 1 and Rack 2 fields indicate Nothing to do.
5. Set the Scan Device switch to "Off".
● Path: Task View (Home) > Setup Cooling > Cooling Setup
Type (Configura- Indicates the type of cooling system. R&S Stan- Configuration No
tion) dard, Com-
The available options depend on the basic setup of the cooling sys-
pact Cooling,
tem in the "Basic Config" menu.
● R&S Standard: Site Cooling,
If a cooling system with flow control is used, select "R&S Stan- R&S Small
dard". (available for
● Compact Cooling: FM only)
If a cooling system without flow control is used, select "Com-
pact Cooling".
● Site Cooling:
If the transmitter is connected to an existing site cooling sys-
tem, select the "Site Cooling" setting. In this case, warning and
fault signaling lines which are routed to terminal x8000 of the
mains distribution board (MDB) are evaluated.
● R&S Small:
If an FM single transmitter is connected to a simplified cooling
system without temperature control, select the "R&S Small" set-
ting.
Heat Exchangers/ Either 1 or 2 redundant heat exchangers can be used in each rack. 1 or 2 Configuration No
Rack (Configura- The set value affects fan monitoring and also the appearance of the
tion) user interface.
This setting is only available for cooling systems with extended mon-
itoring of pumps and fans.
Fans/Heat Either 1 or 2 fans can be used for each heat exchanger. The set 0, 1 or 2 Configuration No
Exchanger (Con- value affects fan monitoring and also the indicators on the user
figuration) interface.
This setting is only available for cooling systems with extended mon-
itoring of pumps and fans.
Heat Exchangers The cooling system can be equipped with one or two redundant heat 1 or 2 Configuration No
(Configuration) exchangers. However, no more than two fans can be used.
This setting is only available for the "Compact Cooling" cooling sys-
tem and only affects the appearance of the user interface.
Fans (Configura- The cooling system can be operated with a maximum of two fans. 0, 1 or 2 Configuration No
tion) The value influences fan monitoring and the appearance of the user
interface.
This setting is only available for the "Compact Cooling" cooling sys-
tem.
Set Point Temper- The temperature control system will attempt to adjust the coolant 25 °C to Maintenance No
ature (Coolant temperature to this value by changing the fan speed at the heat 65 °C
Outlet Tempera- exchangers. If the temperature drops below or exceeds the control
ture) range, the actual coolant temperature can be higher or lower.
This setting is only available for cooling systems with extended mon-
itoring of pumps and fans.
Outlet Tempera- Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing out of the transmit- ‒30 °C to Read only -
ture (Coolant Out- ter rack toward the heat exchanger. The temperature must not +90 °C
let Temperature) exceed a maximum value of 65 °C.
This setting is only available for cooling systems with extended mon-
itoring of pumps and fans.
Fault Limit (Cool- If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a fault is triggered 50 °C to ‒ Maintenance No
ant Outlet Tem- and the rack is shut down. In N+1 systems, this event can lead to 65 °C
perature) switchover of the transmitter.
Warning Limit If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a warning is triggered. 40 °C to Maintenance No
(Coolant Outlet The fault threshold is permanently set to 65 °C. 65 °C
Temperature)
Warning Limit If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a warning is trig- 0 bar to 4 bar Maintenance No
(Coolant Pres- gered. Normally, this value should be set higher than the value for
sure) the corresponding "Fault Limit".
Fault Limit (Cool- If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a fault is trig- 0 bar to 4 bar Maintenance No
ant Pressure) gered. Normally, this value should be lower than the value for the
corresponding "Warning Limit".
Extra Flow Rate In addition to the minimum flow rate predetermined by the number of 0 l/min, +10 l/ Configuration No
(Coolant Pres- amplifiers, the flow can be increased in two stages if additional com- min., +20 l/
sure, Flow) ponents which require cooling (e.g. dummy load) are installed. min.
Desired Pump- Indicates the speed commanded at the pumps. 0 % to 100 % Read only No
Speed (Flow) This display is available for the "Compact Cooling" cooling system.
Auto/On (Cooling If the switch is set to "On", the cooling system is switched on irre- Cooling is Maintenance No
Control) spective of whether or not the transmitter is on. This setting should always On;
only be used when putting the system into operation. If the switch is Cooling is
set to "Auto", the cooling system is switched on/off when the trans- switched on
mitter is switched on/off. using the
parameter
"TX On"
Rotating fans!
Beware of rotating fans when opening the door of the exhaust‑air kit!
Fallback Speed Indicates the speed at which the fans operate if, following a defect at 0 % to 100 % Configuration No
(Fan Control) the TCE900/901 RackControl, an additional power failure with
recovery of the power supply occurs.
The value can be changed here.
Calibrate (Sensor Starts calibration of the pressure sensors. Before starting, it must be Configuration No
Calibration) ensured that the door of the exhaust‑air kit is open. (Caution: Rotat-
ing fans!). Calibration must be carried out each time a pressure sen-
sor is replaced, and can be performed while the transmitter is still in
operation.
State (Sensor Cal- Indicates the calibration state of the pressure sensors. The display In Progress, Read only No
ibration) is only visible during the calibration procedure. Fault
Sensor 1/2 (Sen- Indicates whether the differential pressure sensor in the rear panel OK, Fault Read only No
sor Calibration) of the transmitter is operating properly.
Cooling (Cooling Indicates whether the cooling system is switched on. Auto, On Configuration No
Control) ● Auto
The cooling system is switched on automatically if the program
of at least one transmitter is switched on. If all programs are
switched off, cooling is also switched off.
● On:
Cooling is permanently switched on.
The setting can be changed here.
This menu is only available for liquid‑cooled transmitters with flow and temperature
control by the R&S TCE900/901 SysCrtl.
Max Fan Speed If necessary, the maximum speed of the fans at the heat exchanger 50 % to Maintenance No
(Noise Manage- can be decreased in order to reduce noise. This can, however, 100 %
ment) result in an increase in coolant temperature or even in shutdown of
the transmitter.
Antifreeze Used to define whether or not the fans at the heat exchanger are to Off; On Maintenance No
switch off if the temperature drops well below the specified tempera-
ture.
● Off:
The fans switch off. This setting is recommended in order to
reduce the energy consumption of the cooling system.
● On:
The fans continue to run even at low outside temperatures. This
setting is recommended if the risk of fan seizure due to freezing
is to be reduced. Note: Even if antifreeze mode is active, the
condensation protection function of the transmitter will still
switch off the fans at an inlet temperature below approx.
+10 °C. The fans are designed in such a way that they are not
damaged if they seize up due to freezing.
This menu is only available for liquid‑cooled transmitters with flow and temperature
control by the R&S TCE900/901 SysCrtl.
Scan Devices Used to activate the wizard for logging on fans and pumps to the On/Off Maintenance No
(Scan Control) system bus.
Status (Scan Con- Indicates whether the wizard for logging on pumps and fans to the Off, in Pro- Read only -
trol) system bus is active. gress Fin-
ished
Find Fans (Rack1/ Shows the next action to be performed by the user. Read only -
Rack2) ● Nothing to Do:
The wizard for logging on fans is currently not active.
● Attach Fan x:
Connect the specified fan to the fan bus and wait until the fan is
found.
Repeat this procedure until all fans are logged on to the system.
Find Pumps Shows the next action to be performed by the user. Read only -
(Rack1/Rack2) ● Nothing to Do:
The wizard for logging on pumps is currently not active.
● Attach Pump x:
Connect the specified pump to the pump bus and wait until the
pump is found.
Repeat this procedure until all pumps are logged on to the system.
4.1.3 Options
Deinstalling options
Options can be removed from a unit. This is done in the following way:
● Request a deactivation key from your local Rohde & Schwarz sales partner, speci-
fying the serial number of the key card and the K material number of the option to
be returned.
● Install the deactivation key in the Task View (Home) > Option > Manage Keys
menu.
● Return the option by sending the option key response to your local
Rohde & Schwarz sales partner.
Status (Install/ Indicates whether all SW options are functioning correctly. A yellow Ok, Warning, Read only -
Deinstall) lamp indicates that a temporary option will expire shortly. A red lamp Fault
indicates that a temporary option has expired.
Selected entry Indicates which deactivation key from a list of up to 23 keys is cur- Operation No
(Deactivations) rently being displayed. The list can be scrolled using the "Next
Entry" and "Previous Entry" buttons.
Option Key Num- Shows the K material number of the deactivated option. Read only -
ber (Deactiva-
tions)
Option Key Name Shows the name of the deactivated option. Read only -
(Deactivations)
Option Key Shows the acknowledgment key which confirms that an option has 30 characters Read only -
Response (Deacti- been deactivated.
vations) This key must be sent back to your local sales partner when an
option is returned.
4.1.4 Bitbus
General
The Bitbus protocol is used for remote monitoring of R&S transmitters of the
9000 (Tx9) series.
An external control computer can be connected to the transmitter using the optional
RS‑232 interface. The transmission parameters of the serial interface must be config-
ured at the transmitter such that they are consistent with the settings of the control
computer.
Software option K48 (serial interface) must be installed to enable remote monitoring of
the transmitter via Bitbus. A USB‑to‑RS‑232 adapter approved by Rohde & Schwarz is
also required.
Status Indicates whether Bitbus has been configured correctly. Off, OK, Read only -
● Off Warning
Communication via Bitbus is switched off.
● OK
Bitbus communication is functioning properly.
● Warning
Either Bitbus is not available for the current trans-
mitter configuration or the "Bitbus" option is not
installed. In this case, check in the Task View ->
Options menu whether option K48 (serial inter-
face) is active.
Link Indicates whether the USB‑to‑RS‑232 adapter is con- Off, OK, Read only -
nected to the system control unit. Warning
CRC Indicates whether information regarding options for cor- Off, On Configura- No
recting transmission errors is added to the Bitbus proto- tion
col. The set value must match the setting at the receiv-
ing end.
The setting can be changed here.
Parity Indicates whether information regarding the detection None, Odd, Mainte- No
of transmission errors is added to the Bitbus protocol. Even nance
The set value must match the setting at the receiving
end.
The setting can be changed here.
Stop Bits Shows the minimum length of the pause between two 1, 2 Mainte- No
data packets. The set value must match the setting at nance
the receiving end.
The setting can be changed here.
Flowcontrol Shows the selected method for data flow control. None, Mainte- No
● None XOn/XOff, nance
No data flow control is used. The transmitter and RTS/CTS
receiver must always be able to process their
incoming data packets in good time.
● Xon/Xoff
Data flow control is protocol‑based. By inserting
special control characters into the data stream, the
receiver informs the transmitter whether it is ready
to process data.
● RTS/CTS
Data flow control takes place via two additional
control lines. By switching off a control line, the
receiver informs the transmitter that it is currently
unable to process data.
The set value must match the setting at the receiving
end.
The setting can be changed here.
Baudrate Shows the data transfer rate in baud (bits/s). The set 4800, Mainte- No
value must match the setting at the receiving end. 9600, nance
19200,
The setting can be changed here.
38400,
57600,
115200
Data Bits Indicates how many bits are used for character encod- 7, 8 Mainte- No
ing. nance
The setting can be changed here.
4.1.5.1 General
The simple network management protocol (SNMP) is used for monitoring and control-
ling different instruments in a network. A description of the instrument (management
information base (MIB)) must be loaded in the central unit ("manager") from which the
transmitters are monitored. A monitored instrument contains a program ("agent") which
can answer queries from the manager and execute commands. Furthermore, it is pos-
sible that the agent generates of its own accord a message (called a notification, alarm
or trap) and sends it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a
fault. The MIBs required for monitoring and controlling a transmitter are stored as a ZIP
archive in every instrument. From there, they can be downloaded using any web
browser. When the transmitter is put into operation, both the agent in the transmitter
and the manager must be configured. Additional steps may be necessary if the trans-
mitter is connected via routers, firewalls or similar devices, as they may block data
packets.
You can make settings yourself via the local R&S TDU900/901 display (if available),
via the web server or in part via SNMP. The Task View > System Control > SNMP
menu contains all the settings that are required for accessing a transmitter.
Changes to these settings are adopted immediately. The instrument does not need to
be rebooted.
The XX9 transmitter family supports the versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c. Alarms can
be sent as v1Traps, v2Traps or v2Informs. Several destinations for error messages
(trapsinks) and several communities can be set with read only authorization and read/
write authorization. SNMP is a protocol for remote control and is offered only at the
remote Ethernet interface (X2 – 1000 BASE-T). The system or transmitter has to be
set to remote to execute SET commands.
"SNMP" parameters
● Path: Task View (Home) > SNMP
Status (Gen- Indicates the state of the SNMP function. ---, Off, Read only -
eral) ● ---: Warning,
SNMP is being switched off or on. It is not possible On
to determine the status during this time.
● Off:
SNMP is switched off. No traps are being sent; the
transmitter does not react to SNMP Set/Get com-
mands.
● Warning:
SNMP is switched on; a valid option key has, how-
ever, not been installed.
● On:
SNMP is switched on and is operating correctly.
Enable (Gen- Indicates whether SNMP has been switched on. The Off, On Mainte- No
eral) setting can be changed here. nance
Port Set/Get Shows the UDP port for SNMP SET and GET opera- Mainte- No
(General) tions. nance
The setting can be changed here.
Enable (Com- Indicates whether the displayed community is active or Off, On Mainte- No
munity) not. nance
The setting can be changed here.
Community Name of the community. This name is used as the String Mainte- No
Name (Com- password for queries and settings via SNMP. The nance
munity) default password for reading settings (Access Level =
Read Only) is: "public". The default password for read/
write access (Access Level = Read/Write) is: "broad-
cast". The name is case‑sensitive.
The community name can be changed here.
Access Level Access authorization for the displayed community. Read Only, Mainte- No
(Community) ● Read only Read/Write nance
If the displayed community name is used, only read
access is possible.
● Read/Write
If the displayed community name is used, read and
write access is possible.
Selected Trap Selection element for displaying the settings of one of 1 to 5 Operation No
Sink (Trap up to five trapsinks. If certain events occur, the SNMP
Sinks) system automatically sends an alarm to the specified
address.
Sync Trap Sends the values of all active traps to all active trap - Operation No
Sinks (Trap sinks.
Sinks)
Enable (Trap Indicates whether sending of alarms to the displayed IP Off, On Mainte- No
Sinks) address is active or not. nance
The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and
for testing.
The setting can be changed here.
Version (Trap Shows the SNMP protocol version used to send the v1, v2c Mainte- No
Sinks) alarms. The "Inform" notification type is supported from nance
version v2c and later.
The protocol version can be changed here.
Inform Retry Indicates how frequently the SNMP system is to attempt 0 to 255 Mainte- No
(Trap Sinks) to send an alarm to the set recipient. If no receive con- nance
firmation is sent by the recipient, this alarm stops being
sent after the displayed number of retries has expired.
The setting only affects the "Inform" notify type and can
be changed here.
Community Password of the alarm recipient. The community is sent 1 to 255 Mainte- No
(Trap Sinks) together with each alarm and must match the commun- characters nance
ity set at the recipient. The displayed community can be
changed here.
Port (Trap UDP port of an alarm recipient (e.g. network manage- 0 to 65535 Mainte- No
Sinks) ment system) to which alarms are to be sent. nance
The default is: Port 162
The basic SNMP settings (port, community) must match at the manager end and trans-
mitter end. You typically define these settings for each IP address in your program
(e.g. MIB browser). The SNMP version is also set in the manager; the transmitter then
detects this automatically. SNMP communication should then function correctly.
To be able to monitor and control a transmitter with SNMP, the MIB of the instrument
and a program which can interpret the MIB must be available at the manager end. You
can load all available MIBs from any instrument using a web browser.
● Log in using the web GUI and select the Task View > System Control > Downloads
> Download SNMP MIBs menu.
● Save the mibs.zip file to your computer.
● Load the following MIBs in the MIB browser:
– RS-COMMON-MIB
– RS-XX9-SMI-MIB and RS-XX9-TC-MIB
– RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB
– MIB of the standby concept, standard or option
A detailed description of the MIBs, the information that they contain and the associated
options is given below.
MIBs are available from Rohde & Schwarz and IRT. MIBs from IRT allow transmitters
to be linked using SNMP irrespective of the manufacturer. They are, however, limited
with respect to their functionality.
The MIBs have the naming convention RS-XX9-<TV/radio standard>-<function/
option>-MIB. Examples include: RS-XX9-DVBT2-MIB for DVB-T2 and RS-XX9-AIR-
COOLING-MIB for air cooling.
MIB Description
RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB Contains definitions that comply with all of the transmitters from the XX9 family
(e.g. configuration)
The instrument can be queried by SNMP in order to find out which MIBs have been
implemented. This information is contained in the table "sysORTable"
(OID .iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).mgmt(2).mib-2(1).system(1).sysORTable(9) of
the SNMPv2 MIB). There is a corresponding MIB for each type of modulation.
MIB Description
RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB This MIB contains general data that every instrument supports:
● Transmitter configuration
● Option keys
● Software update
● SNMP configuration
● Release of a test notification
This information always applies to the instrument being monitored
using SNMP.
RS-XX9-MTX-MIB This MIB contains parameters for the following (irrespective of the
modulation type):
● MultiTX
● N+1
RS-XX9-TC-MIB This MIB contains definitions for textual conventions used in other
MIBs.
RS-XX9-TX-MIB This MIB contains parameters for the following (irrespective of the
modulation type):
● Single drive standby concepts
● Passive dual drive
● Active output stage standby
This applies to all power classes in the medium‑power and
high‑power range.
Different parameters are available depending on the system being queried. For exam-
ple, txExcAutoOperationMode (in RS-XX9-TX-MIB) returns NoSuchName when you
query a single transmitter, since it has no automatic exciter switchover. It is easy to find
out which parameters are valid by checking the conformance statements. In the exam-
ple for automatic exciter switchover above, the OID txExcAutoOperationMode is con-
tained in the txObjsExciterAutomatic object group.
With N+1 systems this means that unavailable parameters may receive the response
NoSuchName, e.g. parameters from transmitter A8 if only a 4+1 system is present.
Parameters that allow configuration of the transmitter alarms can be found under the
OID "commonSnmpConfiguration". For example, it is possible to switch off the IRT
alarms (factory default setting: on) and to switch on Rohde & Schwarz alarms (factory
default setting: off). The transmitter-specific alarms offer an extensive range of configu-
ration possibilities. In addition, it is also possible to assign a user-selectable priority
and to check the current state. Since the Rohde & Schwarz MIBs contain a large num-
ber of alarms, three predefined groups for faults, warnings and information exist to
which all alarms are assigned. For each alarm, the respective alarm class is given in
the binding AlarmClass.
Corresponding to the alarms, there are one or more notification tables in the Objects
branch in the MIBs. The information is displayed together there.
In the following example, a transmitter with the IP address 172.29.12.43 queries the
OID sendTestNotification (1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.1). The response from
the agent is "idle(1)". Using a further test, you can check whether the transmitter sends
an alarm message in the event of an error and whether this message reaches the
alarm destinations. To do so, set an OID sendTestNotification to the value of 2 (trig-
ger), which triggers a commonTest trap (1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.0.1000). This
alarm is sent to all recipients which have been entered for the alarms (trapsinks, see
above). This type of error message functions in a slightly different way to that used for
querying and setting values (default: UDP Port 161 for SET/GET and UDP Port 162 for
alarms).
The figure below shows that the testTrap has been received correctly by the
tce900-100100 instrument (serial number 100100).
As an alternative to a web browser, you can also configure alarm sinks with SNMP.
The procedure is described in RFC 3413.
snmpTargetAddrRetryCount 3 3
snmpTargetParamsMPModel 0 1
snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel 1 2
The ENTITY MIB contains information on type plates. The table commonEntPhysicalT-
able in RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB serves as an extension of this. It includes values such
as operating hour counters and the number of restarts.
The following figure shows an excerpt from the table entPhysicalTable of the ENTITY
MIB.
4.1.6 Date/Time
The date and time can be set at each R&S TCE900, R&S TCE901 and R&S TLU9.
The date and time have an effect on the entries in the log book as well as on the time-
stamp when a backup is made.
The time is entered in coordinated universal time (UTC) format. Optionally, an addi-
tional local time offset can also be specified which takes the local time zone as well as
summer time (daylight saving time) and winter time into consideration. The time is dis-
played as the local time.
Apart from manual setting, it is also possible to have the time set automatically via an
NTP server. The NTP server supplies a UTC. The set local time offset is added auto-
matically for display of the local time. The local time offset must be set at each individ-
ual instrument.
The local clocks of all instruments of a transmitter system can be automatically
synchronized with the clock of the system control unit. The internal NTP server on the
system control unit must be activated for this purpose. Time synchronization of all indi-
Time (Local Shows the local time. The time can be changed here. Operation No
Time Setting) The time is entered in coordinated universal time (UTC)
format. It is therefore recommended to correctly set the
local time offset relative to UTC before changing the
time.
Date (Local Shows the current date. The date can be changed Operation No
Time Setting) here. The date format is: DD-MM-YYYY
Hours (UTC Shows the local time offset relative to UTC. The time ‒12 to +14 Mainte- No
Offset) offset is calculated from the time zone + summer time. hours nance
The time offset can be changed here and has a direct
effect on the displayed local time. It is therefore recom-
mended to check (and if necessary to correct) the local
time offset before setting the local time.
Minutes (UTC Shows the local time offset relative to UTC. The time ‒59 to +59 Mainte- No
Offset) offset is calculated from the time zone + summer time. min nance
The time offset can be changed here and has a direct
effect on the displayed local time. It is therefore recom-
mended to check (and if necessary to correct) the local
time offset before setting the local time.
Status Indicates whether automatic time synchronization via Disabled, Read only -
NTP (Network Time Protocol) is active. OK, Fault
● Disabled:
Automatic time synchronization is not active.
● OK:
The NTP client of the transmitter is able to
exchange time synchronization packets with an
NTP server.
● Fault:
Time synchronization packets cannot be
exchanged with an NTP server.
The frequency at which the transmitter exchanges syn-
chronization data with an NTP server depends on the
accuracy of the internal clock. It varies between 16 sec-
onds and 17 minutes. To prevent the status from
changing continually, three successive synchronization
attempts must fail before a fault is indicated. If the NTP
server fails, it can therefore take up to 51 minutes for a
fault to be indicated.
Server Shows the IP address of the NTP server. If available, IP-V4 Mainte- No
an external NTP server should be entered for the sys- Address nance
tem control unit. This field can be left empty for
lower‑level transmitters or exciters which are to be
synchronized with the system control unit. In this case,
synchronization takes place via NTP broadcast. Alter-
natively, the IP address of the system control unit can
also be entered for lower‑level instruments.
The power test point needs to be calibrated once during transmitter setup so that the
displayed power corresponds to the real output power.
Recalibration of the power test point is necessary in the following cases:
● Change in output power
● Change in transmit frequency
● Change in modulation mode
1. Call the Home > Transmitter > Calibrate Power menu and press the "Identify" but-
ton so that the test point is found.
The status indicator for the test point (Power Sensor) displays OK (green).
4. Using the external power meter, check the current transmitter power and correct it
if necessary by changing the "Power" value until the desired power is displayed on
the power meter and is the same as the set nominal power of the transmitter.
Nominal Power Shows the value which the "Forward Power" power indicator is to 0 W to Configuration Yes
(Calibration) display after calibration of the power test point. 300 kW
The setting can be changed here.
Power (Calibra- To calibrate the power test point, this value must be adjusted with 0 % to 130 % Configuration Yes
tion) the transmitter switched on so that an external power meter at the Only TLU9:
output of the transmitter then displays the desired output power.
3 % to 106 %
Forward Power Indicates the output power of the transmitter. 0 W to Read only -
(Calibration) 300 kW
After calibration of the power test point, the displayed value should
correspond to the real output power, with a deviation of ±5 %.
Calibrate (Calibra- Saves the calibration data in the power test point. Configuration No
tion)
Reset Calibration Deletes the calibration data saved in the power test point. Configuration No
(Calibration)
Status (Calibra- Indicates whether the power test point has been calibrated. Not Calibra- Read only -
tion) ted, Calibra-
ted
Identify (Power Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Configuration No
Sensor) When this button is pressed, a green LED at the power test point
flashes for approx. 30 seconds.
This allows the power test point belonging to this power indicator to
be found easily in the rack.
Sensor Status Only applies to the instruments R&S TCE900 and R&S TCE901. Not Connec- Read only -
(Sensor) ted, Out of
Indicates whether the power meter is working correctly.
● Not Connected: Range, Over-
Communication between the power meter and the transmitter temperature,
control unit has been interrupted. Uncalibrated,
● Out of Range: OK
The power meter is incorrectly calibrated.
● Overtemperature:
The power meter is too hot. The displayed values may deviate
greatly from the real values.
● Uncalibrated:
The power meter is not calibrated. This message may appear if
"Nominal Power", "Power" or the modulation has been
changed.
● OK:
The power meter is calibrated and is working properly.
In these menues the amplifiers of transmitter systems with one and more racks can be
adjusted to each other.
The following functions are available:
● Addressing of the amplifiers at the internal communication bus
● Efficiency optimization by decreasing the transistor voltage
● Phase compensation for all amplifiers of a rack to each other
● Adjusting the operating point of one amplifier's transistors
4.1.8.1 Settings
Power RF Shows the reference voltage of the amplifiers in percent 0..100% Configura- Yes
for adjusting the output power. After changing this setting tion
the power displays have to be recalibrated.
Adaptive DC Activates automatic adjustment of the transistor voltage Off,On Operation Yes
for increasing the efficiency.
● Off:
The value can be entered manually or in the menu
"Device View > Exciter > Precorrection > Non Lin-
ear" an ideal transistor voltage can be investigated.
This value is stored in the exciters of the transmitter
system in the preset.
● On:
The transistor voltage is readjusted automatically
during the operation of the transmitter system. The
current transistor voltage is not stored in the exciter's
preset.
Amplifiers Shows the number of amplifiers, detected at the commu- 1..72 Read Only -
nication bus.
Sort Amplifi- The amplifiers are sorted in the right order at the commu- Configura- -
ers nication bus. This function has to be activated, if two or tion
more amplifiers are replaced in the transmitter system.
Sorting Shows, whether the sorting of the amplifiers at the com- Idle, in Read Only -
munication bus is just running. Progress
The amplifiers of a rack are at delivery always coupled such that the phase is correct.
Therefore the phase of all amplifiers should be set to 0 %. For special use cases it is
possible to alter the relative phase of single amplifiers with this function.
● Path: Task View > Output Stage > Settings
Phase Amp Shows the phase angles of the amplifier. -100..100 Mainte- No
1..12 % nance
All amplifiers of a rack are at delivery coupled such that
the phase is correct. Therefore the phase of all amplifiers
basically should be set to 0 %. For special use cases it is
possible to alter the relative phase of the amplifiers to
each other.
Adjusting the operating point of the power transistors permits optimum precorrection of
the amplifier and also optimizes the efficiency of the transmitter. The operating point is
preadjusted at the factory, but it may be necessary to check the operating point and, if
necessary, to readjust it.
To check the operating point, the amplifier must be switched on and its output signal
must be muted. This state can be achieved by setting the output power of the transmit-
ter to 0 W. In the muted and adjusted state, the displayed transistor currents should be
approx. 1.3 A (R&S®PMU901) or 2.6 A (R&S®PHU901). If the displayed currents devi-
ate by more than 20 % from those specified, the operating point should be readjusted.
The operating point is adjusted with the transmitter switched on and after a burn‑in
phase of at least 10 minutes.
5. Wait until adjustment has been completed. This can take up to 6 minutes.
Depending on the amplifier configuration, the output power of the transmitter can drop
below the warning/fault threshold during adjustment of the operating point. If an n+1
automatic function is used, the transmitter should be removed from the automatic func-
tion before adjustment is started.
Amplifiers Shows the serial number of the selected amplifier rack- Read only
Serial Num- mount. Before adjustment is started, the serial number
ber sticker on the front of the amplifier should be checked to
ensure that the correct amplifier is being addressed. If
this is not the case, the sorting of the amplifiers must be
corrected. Alternatively, the Identify button can also be
used for identification.
Bias Adjust Starts automatic operating point adjustment. This is only Maintenance
Start possible if the amplifier is switched on and has already
been running for several minutes. Before the function is
started, it must be checked whether the correct amplifier
is selected.
Bias Adjust Stops adjustment after it has been started, and restores Maintenance
Stop the last available adjustment values.
Identify Causes all LEDs on the front panel of the amplifier to Maintenance
flash for 4 seconds. This is used to check whether the
correct amplifier is being addressed. If this is not the
case, the sorting of the amplifiers must be corrected.
Alternatively, the displayed serial number can also be
compared with the sticker on the front panel.
Bias Zero Resets the operating point for this amplifier to zero. This Maintenance
function must be performed immediately before a transis-
tor is replaced.
Transmitter Switches all amplifiers and the exciter located in the pro- Off, On Operation
On/Off gram path on and off.
Adjust Pro- Indicates using a value (0 % to 100 %) how far adjust- 0 % to 100 % Read only
gress ment has progressed. If the amplifier has not yet run in
thermally, it can take several minutes before the progress
is displayed.
Bias Fail Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more No Error, Read only
transistors cannot be adjusted. Abort Adjust,
● "No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment Error on PA
has been performed properly. On, Adjust
● Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because Error
a constant temperature has not settled in the ampli-
fier. In this case, adjustment should be started again
immediately after the fault has occurred.
● "Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a techni-
cal fault in the amplifier; the amplifier should be
replaced.
V+ Mon Displays the voltage supplied to the transistor blocks by Read only
the power supply unit. With R&S®PMU9, the displayed
voltage should be approx. 44 V. With R&S®PHU9, the
displayed voltage varies during adjustment between
approx. 35 V and approx. 50 V. If the displayed voltage is
0 V, either the power supply unit is faulty or the amplifier
has not been switched on.
I Drv Indicates the current flowing through the transistors of the Read only
driver module.
I1 A Indicates the current flowing through transistors V14 and Read only
V15 (R&S®PHU901) and V500 (R&S®PMU901) in tran-
sistor block A.
I2A Indicates the current flowing through transistors V16 and Read only
V17 (R&S®PHU901) and V1500 (R&S®PMU901) in tran-
sistor block A.
I3A Indicates the current flowing through transistors V18 and Read only
V19 (R&S®PHU901) and V2500 (R&S®PMU901) in tran-
sistor block A.
I1B Indicates the current flowing through transistors V24 and Read only
V25 (R&S®PHU901) and V600 (R&S®PMU901) in tran-
sistor block B.
I2B Indicates the current flowing through transistors V26 and Read only
V27 (R&S®PHU901) and V1600 (R&S®PMU901) in tran-
sistor block B.
I3B Indicates the current flowing through transistors V28 and Read only
V29 (R&S®PHU901) and V2600 (R&S®PMU901) in tran-
sistor block B.
Read Reads in all parameters of the transmitter and displays them in a list. Operation -
The filter rule specified under "Show" is applied when the parame-
ters are read in.
Export Exports the summary to the file system of a notebook in the form of Operation -
a text file and HTML file. The storage location of the files is prede-
fined and is displayed next to the Export button.
● Path: Task View (Home) > Inputs > Transmitter > Exciter > Config.
The description of the parameters for the standards DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T, ATSC
and DTMB is given in ""Task View Input Config" parameters" on page 129.
The description of the parameters for the standard DAB is given in ""Task View Config"
parameters" on page 268.
The description of the parameters for the standard FM is given in ""Config" parameters
(Task View)" on page 281.
This menu is used to enter custom settings to determine how the transmitter behaves
during operation and how measured values are displayed.
Location Shows the location of the system. The displayed loca- 20 charac- Mainte- No
tion is shown in the "System Overview" menu. The set- ters nance
ting can be changed here.
Unit Tempera- Indicates the unit in which the temperatures of the cool- Celsius, Operation No
ture ing system are to be displayed. The setting can be Fahren-
changed here. heit, Kel-
vin
Unit Pressure Indicates the unit in which the pressures of the cooling Bar, psi, Operation No
system are to be displayed. The setting can be changed Pa, at
here.
Reset On Pro- Indicates whether faults (e.g. Reflection Fail) stored No, Yes Mainte- No
gram Off when the program of a transmitter is switched off are to nance
be deleted automatically. This function should be activa-
ted if the transmitter is monitored via a parallel remote
control interface, because this interface does not have
its own control line to perform a reset.
Prog. Off on Indicates whether the RF of the transmitter is to be No, Yes Configura- No
Sum Fault switched off when a fault occurs. The setting can be tion
changed here.
● No:
When a fault occurs, the transmitter continues to
transmit, provided that it is still able to do so. This
is the recommended setting for most applications.
● Yes:
When a fault occurs, the RF is switched off imme-
diately. This setting should only be selected for cer-
tain applications.
TX Location Shows the location of the transmitter. In the case of 20 charac- Mainte- No
login via a web browser, this location is displayed when ters nance
the user signs in at a MultiTX or n+1 system directly at
the remote interface of a transmitter. The setting can be
changed here.
Transmitter Shows the transmitter name. The transmitter name is 20 charac- Mainte- No
Name also shown in the "TX Overview" menu. The name can ters nance
be changed here.
Reflection Indicates whether, when reflection occurs at the output Yes, No Configura- No
Check of the transmitter, a check is to be performed multiple tion
times to establish whether the reflection trigger is still
present, or whether a fault is to be generated immedi-
ately.
● Yes:
When a reflection occurs, the output signal is first
switched off. The RF is switched on again up to 3
times within a minute in order to check whether the
reflection trigger is still present. After the third
unsuccessful attempt, the RF is switched off per-
manently. This setting should be selected for nor-
mal transmitter operation.
● No:
When a reflection occurs, the output signal is per-
manently switched off immediately and a fault is
indicated. This setting should only be selected for
certain applications.
The setting can be changed here.
Left Bargraph Indicates whether the measuring instrument on the left Watt, Per- Mainte-
in the "TX Overview" menu is to display the transmit cent nance
power in watts or as a percentage relative to the nomi-
nal power. The setting can be changed here.
Right Bar- Indicates whether the measuring instrument on the right Reflected Mainte-
graph in the "TX Overview" menu is to display the reflected Power, nance
power in watts, the reflected power in relation to the for- VSWR,
ward power (VSWR) or the efficiency of the amplifiers. PA-Effi-
The setting can be changed here. ciency (%)
Screen Saver Indicates the time after which the automatic screensa- 0 to 65535 Operation
TMO ver is to become active. sec
This function is used to prevent the backlighting of the
TDU901 display unit from aging prematurely.
The screensaver can be deactivated by setting the
value "0".
4.1.12 Software
The software of the R&S TCE900, R&S TCE901 and R&S TLU9 can be updated.
Installing a new version will make new features available and will improve the function-
ality of the transmitter. New software versions are supplied as a file which can be run
under MS Windows. Apart from the instrument software, this file also contains the
"R&S Software Distributor" tool which allows the software to be installed on several
instruments at the same time. The R&S Software Distributor supports all modules
within a transmitter system.
The instrument must be prepared for the software update before installation is started.
To ensure that the R&S Software Distributor finds this instrument in the network, the
software update must be started in the Task View > Maintain SW > SW Update menu.
Alternatively, "Update Mode" can be set to "Permanent" in this menu. This allows the
software to be updated at any time without preparation.
The software update can then be performed on a Windows PC which is connected to
the transmitter via the network.
● Deactivate the energy-saving option of the network card in the PC:
– Under Windows, call the Device Manager by selecting Start > Control Panel >
System > Hardware > Device Manager.
– In the Device Manager, select the correct network adapter and double-click to
call the associated Properties window.
– In the Properties window, select the Power Management tab and (if neces-
sary) deactivate the Allow computer to turn off this device to save power
option.
● On the PC, start the installation software. The start window of the R&S Software
Distributor appears.
● Confirm the default setting Remote Installation with Next.
Update Status Indicates whether the instrument is ready for the instrument soft- Stopped, Read only -
(Software Update) ware update. Started
● Stopped:
The Software Distributor cannot find the instrument in the net-
work. It is not possible to update the software.
● Started:
The instrument is listed in the update list of the R&S Software Dis-
tributor and the software can be updated.
Update Mode Indicates how the software can be updated. Manual, Per- Maintenance No
(Software Update) ● Manual: manent
The instrument can be found by the Software Distributor for
approx. 90 seconds after the "Start Update" button is pressed.
● Permanent:
The instrument can be found by the Software Distributor at any time.
The software can be updated at any time without the instrument
needing to be prepared for a software update.
The setting can be changed here.
SW Version (Soft- Shows the software version currently installed on the instrument. - Read only -
ware Update) The first number of the displayed SW version must be identical on
all instruments of a system to ensure that the system operates cor-
rectly.
Device Name Shows the name under which this instrument appears in the list of Up to 20 char- Maintenance No
(Software Update) the Software Distributor. acters
The setting can be changed here.
Start Update Starts the enable phase of a software update if "Update Mode" is - Maintenance No
(Software Update) set to "Manual".
The enable phase is active for approx. 90 seconds. During this time,
the instrument can be found in the network by the Software Distribu-
tor.
Device Group Shows the device group. The displayed device group must be the DEFAULT Read only -
(Software Update) same as the device group set in the Software Distributor so that this
instrument is displayed in the list of devices found by the Software
Distributor.
4.1.12.2 Backup/Restore
This function is used to make a backup of the currently installed software version as
well as all settings of the instrument. This backup is initially made on the file system of
the instrument and can then be either downloaded from the instrument or restored at a
later time.
Backups of the same instrument and also of other instruments can be uploaded from
an external storage medium and then restored.
It is possible either to make a complete backup consisting of the installed software as
well as all settings or just to save the settings.
If a complete backup is made before the software of the instrument is updated, it is
then possible to revert to the old software version after the software has been updated
by restoring the old version from the backup.
If only the setting values are saved, they can only be copied back to an instrument
which has the same software version as the instrument on which the backup was
made.
"Backup/Restore" parameters
● Path:Task View (Home) > Maintain SW > Backup/Restore
Backup State Shows the action which has just been performed. Ready, Read only -
(Backup/Restore) ● Ready Backup/
The backup/restore functions can be started. Check/
● Backup in Progress Restore/
A backup has been started and will then be saved in the inter- Download/
nal file system of the instrument. Upload in
● Check in Progress Progress
The backup uploaded to the instrument is being checked.
● Restore in Progress
The backup saved in the internal file system is being restored
on the instrument.
● Download in Progress
The backup saved in the instrument is being copied to an exter-
nal storage medium.
● Upload in Progress
A backup is being copied from an external storage medium to
the instrument.
Start Backup Starts the creation of a backup. The backup is saved in the internal - Maintenance No
(Backup/Restore) file system of the instrument and contains the current program ver-
sion as well as all setting values of the instrument. Creating a
backup causes the instrument to reboot.
Start Restore Restores the program version and all settings from the backup - Maintenance No
(Backup/Restore) saved in the file system of the instrument.Restoring a backup cau-
ses the instrument to reboot.
Backup Type Indicates which data the backup is to contain. Full, Settings Maintenance No
● Full only
The backup is to contain the currently installed operating soft-
ware as well as all settings stored on the instrument.
● Settings only
The backup is to contain only the settings stored on the instru-
ment.
The setting can be changed here.
When restoring a backup that contains only settings, it is important
to note that this backup can only be copied to an instrument which
has the same software version as the instrument that was used to
make the backup. The version may only differ with respect to its
patch level.
Download File Copies the backup saved in the file system of the instrument to an - Maintenance No
(Backup/Restore) external storage medium. This function is only available in the case
of operation via a web browser.
Upload File Copies a backup from an external storage medium to the instrument. - Maintenance No
(Backup/Restore) This function is only available in the case of operation via a web
browser.
File State (File Shows the state of the backup saved on the instrument. - Read only -
Info) ● Available Backup OK
The backup is OK.
● No Backup Available
No backup has yet been made on or uploaded to this instru-
ment.
● Invalid Backup
The backup is faulty. The backup cannot be used.
● Invalid Device
The backup is not compatible with this instrument. None of the
files from this backup can be restored on this instrument.
● Invalid Checksum
The check routine performed on the backup returned a check-
sum error. The backup cannot be used in this case.
● Not Compatible
The backup loaded from an external storage medium is not
compatible with this instrument. The backup cannot be used in
this case.
● Invalid Software Version
To be able to operate, this instrument requires a more recent
software version than that contained in the backup.
Backup Type Indicates the content of the backup. Full, Settings Read only -
● Full only
The uploaded backup contains the software version displayed
under "SW/FW/Bios Number" as well as all the settings of this
instrument.
● Settings only
The uploaded backup only contains the settings of this instru-
ment.
A restore is only possible in this case if the displayed software
version of the backup is identical to the software version instal-
led on this instrument. (See the "Software Update" tab). The
displayed version numbers may only differ with respect to the
patch level.
Name (File Info) Shows the name of the instrument from which the backup originates. - Read only -
If the displayed name is not the same as the name of this instru-
ment, the backup cannot be restored. The Invalid Device fault is
displayed in this case.
TX Name (File Shows the name of the transmitter from which the backup originates. - Read only -
Info)
Part Number (File Shows the part number of the instrument from which the backup - Read only -
Info) originates. The backup can only be restored if the displayed part
number is identical to the part number of this instrument. The Not
Compatible fault will otherwise be displayed.
Date Time (File Indicates when the backup was made. - Read only -
Info)
Serial Number Shows the serial number of the instrument from which the backup - Read only -
(File Info) was made.
SW Version (File Shows the software version which the backup contains. If the - Read only -
Info) backup only contains setting values, this backup can only be instal-
led if its SW version is identical to the software version installed on
this instrument. The displayed version number may only differ with
respect to its patch level.
MD5 Checksum After a backup has been generated, this parameter shows a check- - Read only -
sum for the generated file. After this file has been downloaded, the
checksum can be recalculated and compared using an external tool.
If there are differences, the downloaded file is corrupt and the down-
load must be performed again.
4.1.13 Presets
All the program and feed settings of a transmitter are saved in a preset. These are:
● Transmit frequency
● Output power
● Adjustment of power test points
● Warning and fault thresholds of power monitoring
● Signal feed settings
● Multicast address with IP feed
● Automatic input signal switchover
● Reference
● SFN settings
● Modulation settings
● Characteristic curves of linear and nonlinear precorrection
The following settings are NOT saved in presets:
● Configuration of linear and nonlinear precorrection
● Basic configuration of the instruments
● IP addresses
● SNMP settings
● NTP settings
● Redundancy settings of N+1, active standby and dual‑drive systems
● Settings of "switchless combiner"
● Configuration of cooling system
● Options
● Software version
● TV standard
● Program/reserve ON/OFF
● Local/remote
● Custom settings
● Bias and phase adjust of amplifiers
● SAT receiver option: LNB control voltage
Active Preset Indicates which settings are currently active. If a preset Not Active, Read only -
(Common) has not yet been loaded, "Not Active" is displayed. Preset 1 to
4 Active
Program Set- Shows a warning if, after a preset is loaded, the cur- Presets not Read only -
tings (Com- rently active settings have been changed but not yet Used, Not
mon) saved again in a preset. In this case, data will be lost if Saved,
the preset is switched over to a different preset. If all Saved
memory locations are empty, "Presets not Used"
appears.
Load Preset Activates one of up to four previously saved sets of pro- Button 1 to Mainte- No
Buttons (Load gram and feed setting values. If a name is assigned to 4 nance
Preset) a preset, this name appears on the button. "Load Pre-
set" is only available for used memory locations.
Save Preset Saves all currently active program and feed settings to Button 1 to Mainte- No
Buttons (Save one of four memory locations. Previously saved set- 4 nance
Active Config) tings are overwritten. If a name is assigned to a preset,
this name appears on the button. "Save Preset" is only
available if all components of the transmitter are oper-
ating correctly.
Preset 1-4 Shows the name of the respective preset. The name 16 charac- Mainte- No
Name (Preset can be changed here and can be up to 16 characters ters nance
Names) long. The name is shown on the "Load" and "Save" pre-
set buttons in the "Load/Save Presets" folder. If the
name is no more than 10 characters long, the number
of the preset is also shown on the button.
4.2 Precorrection
Each exciter is equipped with an adaptive precorrector that continuously compensates
for nonlinear distortion of the amplifiers and linear distortions of the output filter. As a
result, in both cases a high‑quality signal is present at the output of the transmitter.
For measuring purposes, the adaptive nonlinear precorrector can be bypassed (Adap-
tive Predistortion = Bypass) so that the exciter delivers an undistorted signal at its RF
output.
The precorrector can be restarted manually (Reset), making it possible to calculate a
better precorrection curve, even if the shoulder distance has not yet been undershot.
The current precorrection curve is lost as a result.
Efficiency optimization
Available as an option for all COFDM standards
The "Dynamic DC Control" feature allows automatic or adaptive lowering of the transis-
tor voltage without reducing the shoulder distance. This function increases the effi-
ciency of the transmitter.
The transistor voltage can be changed in three ways:
● Manually:
In the "Task View > Output Stage > Settings" menu, the transistor voltage can be
set manually from 50 % to 110 % of the nominal value.
● Automatic "one‑shot" function:
In the "Device View > Exciter > Precorrection > NonLinear" menu, the ideal transis-
tor voltage can be determined by pressing the "Find Optimum" button.
● Adaptively:
In the "Task View > Output Stage > Settings" menu, continuous adaptation of the
transistor voltage can be achieved by activating the "Dynamic DC" function. This
offsets long‑term aging effects of the transistors.
Adaptive Precor- The nonlinear precorrector is used to compensate for amplifier Bypass, Stop, Maintenance No
rection (Settings) faults. The quality of precorrection affects the shoulder distance of Run
the output signal.
The setting can be changed here.
● Bypass
The nonlinear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not
modified inside the exciter.
● Stop
Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that
was determined last is active inside the exciter.
● Run
The adaptive precorrector is active. The optimum precorrection
curve to compensate for amplitude and phase errors of the
amplifiers is determined continuously.
In certain situations, it may be advisable to have a suitable precor-
rection curve determined automatically first and then to switch adap-
tive precorrection to "Stop" so that the found precorrection curve can
no longer change.
Calculation of a new precorrection curve can be forced by perform-
ing a reset.
Status (Settings) Shows the status of the nonlinear precorrector. Idle, Acquisi- Read only -
● Idle tion, Calcula-
The precorrector is not active. tion
● Acquisition
The precorrector is currently recording new measurement val-
ues.
● Calculation
The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection
curve.
● Check Result
The result of the last calculation is checked for plausibility.
Input Level (Set- Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input" OK, Too Low, Read only -
tings) appears if the transmitter is off or if the connection to the RF test Too High, No
point is interrupted. Input
Slope (Settings) Shows the value for asymmetry adjustment. Asymmetry is caused ‒1 dB to 1 dB Maintenance No
by the RF cable between the test point and the test input of the non-
linear precorrector. The setting can be changed here.
Reset (Settings) Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new Maintenance No
precorrection curve is calculated.
Shoulder Distance Shows the minimum shoulder distance that is to be achieved by the 30 dB to Maintenance Yes
(Shoulders) adaptive nonlinear precorrector. 45 dB
The setting can be changed here.
The precorrector will calculate a new precorrection curve as soon as
a shoulder distance below the set value is measured.
Shoulder Left Shows the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic Read only -
(Shoulders) switchover, measured in the left part of the signal spectrum.
Shoulder Right Shows the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic Read only -
(Shoulders) switchover, measured in the right part of the signal spectrum.
Status (Dynamic Indicates whether the ideal amplifier transistor voltage for efficiency Disabled, Read only -
DC Control) optimization has been found. Idle, In Pro-
gress Once,
In Progress
Adaptive,
Optimal, Sta-
ble
Find Optimum Starts the search for the lowest possible transistor voltage at which Maintenance -
(Dynamic DC the desired shoulder distance can still be maintained.
Control) This function is available if adaptive adaptation of the transistor volt-
age is deactivated in the "Task View > Output Stage > Settings"
menu.
In dual drive/backup drive systems, it is irrelevant which exciter
starts this function.
DC Control Shows the transistor voltage relative to the nominal value. 50% to 110% Read only -
(Dynamic DC ● With "Manual" mode
Control) The displayed value is identical to the value set manually in the
"Task View > Output Stage > Settings" menu.
● With "Automatic" mode
The displayed value can deviate from the value set manually in
the "Task View > Output Stage > Settings" menu.
With dual drive/backup drive systems, the displayed value
applies to both exciters.
● With "Adaptive" mode
The displayed value can deviate from the value set manually in
the "Task View > Output Stage > Settings" menu.
With dual drive/backup drive systems, both exciters are control-
led independently.
"Linear" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Linear
Adaptive Precor- The linear precorrector is used to compensate for output filter faults. Bypass, Stop, Maintenance No
rection (Settings) The quality of precorrection affects the amplitude and group delay Run
ripple of the output signal.
The setting can be changed here.
● Bypass
The linear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not modi-
fied inside the exciter.
● Stop
Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that
was determined last is active inside the exciter.
● Run
The adaptive precorrector is active. The optimum precorrection
curve to compensate for amplitude and group delay errors
caused by the output filter is determined continuously.
In certain situations, it may be advisable to have a suitable precor-
rection curve determined automatically first and then to switch adap-
tive precorrection to "Stop" so that the found precorrection curve can
no longer change.
Status (Settings) Shows the status of the linear precorrector. Idle, Acquisi- Read only -
● Idle tion, Calcula-
The precorrector is not active. tion
● Acquisition
The precorrector is currently recording new measurement val-
ues.
● Calculation
The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection
curve.
Input Level (Set- Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input" OK, Too Low, Read only -
tings) appears if the transmitter is off. Too High, No
Input
Slope (Settings) Shows the asymmetry compensation caused by the RF cable used ‒1 dB to 1 dB Maintenance Yes
between the RF test point downstream of the output filter and the
input of the linear precorrector.
The setting can be changed here.
Reset (Settings) Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new Maintenance No
precorrection curve is calculated.
Amplitude Ripple Shows the desired maximum amplitude ripple at the output of the fil- 0 dB to 2 dB Maintenance Yes
Limit (Amplitude ter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the precor-
Ripple Limiter) rector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the ampli-
tude ripple remains below the specified limit.
The setting can be changed here.
Amplitude Ripple Indicates whether the limit set for the amplitude ripple can be ach- Limit OK, Read only -
(Amplitude Ripple ieved by the linearity precorrector. Limit
Limiter) Unreachable,
If the selected limit is too low, a warning is displayed. In this case,
Limit Unval-
the precorrector will retain the curve last calculated.
ued
Amplitude Ripple Shows the residual ripple (in dB) in the amplitude frequency Read only -
(Amplitude Ripple response attained by the circuit for automatic switchover.
Limiter)
Group Delay Limit Shows the desired maximum group delay ripple at the output of the 10 ns to Maintenance Yes
(Group Delay Lim- filter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the pre- 500 ns
iter) corrector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the
group delay ripple remains below the specified limit.
The setting can be changed here.
Group Delay Indicates whether the limit set for the group delay can be achieved Limit OK, Read only -
(Group Delay Lim- by the linearity precorrector. Limit
iter) Unreachable
If the selected limit is too low, a warning is displayed. In this case,
the precorrector will retain the curve last calculated.
Group Delay Rip- Shows the residual ripple (in ns) in the group delay attained by the Read only -
ple (Group Delay circuit for automatic switchover.
Ripple)
Reduction Activates manual crest factor reduction. This function is used to opti- Bypass, Man- Maintenance No
mize the efficiency of the transmitter. ual
● Bypass
Deactivates crest factor reduction.
● Manual
Activates manual crest factor reduction.
Crest Factor Used to set the crest factor of the exciter output signal. Setting a low 7 dB to 15 dB Maintenance No
crest factor allows the efficiency of the transmitter to be increased as
a result of the lower operating voltage of the amplifiers. This can
lead to an increase in intermodulation products outside the fre-
quency band and to a reduction in MER.
Inband Noise Increasing this value results in a lower crest factor. This, however, 10 % to Maintenance No
reduces MER. 100 %
Outband Noise Increasing this value produces a lower crest factor; however, this 0 % to 50 % Maintenance No
results in an increase in intermodulation products outside the fre-
quency band.
"Quality" parameters
Available as an option for all COFDM standards
● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Quality
Shoulder Left Shows the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic Read only -
(Spectrum) switchover, measured in the left part of the signal spectrum.
The displayed value is identical to the value in the "Non Linear"
menu.
Shoulder Right Shows the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic Read only -
(Spectrum) switchover, measured in the right part of the signal spectrum.
The displayed value is identical to the value in the "Non Linear"
menu.
Shoulder (Spec- Indicates whether the measured values for "Shoulder Left" and Invalid, Valid Read only -
trum) "Shoulder Right" are valid.
Measurement cannot take place if the nonlinear precorrector is oper-
ated in "bypass" mode or if the input signal level of the nonlinear
precorrector is outside the valid range.
Amplitude Ripple Shows the residual ripple (in dB) in the amplitude frequency Read only -
(Spectrum) response attained by the circuit for automatic switchover.
The displayed value is identical to the measured value in the "Lin-
ear" menu.
Group Delay Rip- Shows the residual ripple (in ns) in the group delay attained by the Read only -
ple (Spectrum) circuit for automatic switchover.
The displayed value is identical to the measured value in the "Lin-
ear" menu.
Ripple (Spectrum) Indicates whether the measured values for "Amplitude Ripple" and Invalid, Valid Read only -
"Group Delay Ripple" are valid.
Measurement cannot take place if the linear precorrector is operated
in "bypass" mode or if the input signal level of the linear precorrector
is outside the valid range.
PAPR (Spectrum) The peak‑to‑average‑power ratio indicates the ratio between the Read only -
peak power and average power relative to the set modulation band-
width.
MER The modulation error ratio describes the signal quality. Read only -
A poor MER is caused by random shifting of the constellation points
in the constellation diagram. From a certain value, a receiver can no
longer cleanly distinguish the positions of the constellation points,
resulting in picture failure points.
MER Status Indicates whether the measured MER is above or below the set Off, too low, Read only -
warning threshold. OK
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the MER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
the measured MER drops below the set threshold value, a warning
is issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
Input Level Indicates whether the signal level of the RF probe is in the valid OK, Too Low, -
range. Too High, ----
"----" is displayed if the transmitter is switched off or the connection
to the RF probe is interrupted.
When the characteristic is calculated, it is divided into three linear areas by the two
onset points.
No phase shift takes place for modulation of the picture signal in the area between the
two onset points, i.e. a correction phase of 0° is set.
A correction phase unequal to 0° is set in the case of picture signal modulation which is
greater than the position of onset point 1. The characteristic in this area begins with a
correction phase of 0°, with modulation corresponding to the position of onset point 1,
and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with slope 1, with 100 % modula-
tion of the picture signal.
Similarly, a correction phase unequal to 0° is also set in the case of picture signal mod-
ulation which is smaller than the position of onset point 2. The characteristic in this
area begins with a correction phase of 0°, with modulation corresponding to the posi-
tion of onset point 2, and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with slope 2,
with 0 % modulation of the picture signal.
Adaptive Precor- The nonlinear precorrector is used to compensate for amplifier Bypass, Stop, Maintenance No
rection faults. The quality of precorrection affects the shoulder distance of Run
the output signal.
The setting can be changed here.
● Bypass
The nonlinear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not
modified inside the exciter.
● Stop
Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that
was determined last is active inside the exciter.
● Run
The automatic precorrector is active. The optimum precorrec-
tion curve to compensate for amplitude and phase errors of the
amplifiers is determined once. The precorrector then enters
"Stop" mode. The program is interrupted during precorrection.
Calculation of a new precorrection curve can be forced by perform-
ing a reset.
Input Level Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input" OK, Too Low, Read only -
appears if the transmitter is off or if the connection to the RF test Too High, No
point is interrupted. Input
Status Shows the status of the nonlinear precorrector. Idle, Acquisi- Read only -
● Idle tion, Calcula-
The precorrector is not active. tion
● Acquisition
The precorrector is currently recording new measurement val-
ues.
● Calculation
The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection
curve.
Reset Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new Maintenance No
precorrection curve is calculated.
"Linear" parameters
● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Linear
Adaptive Precor- The linear precorrector is used to compensate for output filter faults. Bypass, Stop, Maintenance No
rection The quality of precorrection affects the amplitude and group delay Run
ripple of the output signal.
The setting can be changed here.
● Bypass
The linear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not modi-
fied inside the exciter.
● Stop
Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that
was determined last is active inside the exciter.
● Run
The automatic precorrector is active. The optimum precorrec-
tion curve to compensate for amplitude and group delay errors
caused by the output filter is determined once. The precorrector
then enters "Stop" mode. The program is interrupted during pre-
correction.
Input Level Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input" OK, Too Low, Read only -
appears if the transmitter is off. Too High, No
Input
Amplitude Ripple Shows the desired maximum amplitude ripple at the output of the fil- 0 dB to 2 dB Maintenance Yes
Limit ter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the precor-
rector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the ampli-
tude ripple remains below the specified limit.
The setting can be changed here.
Group Delay Limit Shows the desired maximum group delay ripple at the output of the 10 ns to Maintenance Yes
filter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the pre- 500 ns
corrector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the
group delay ripple remains below the specified limit.
The setting can be changed here.
Amplitude Ripple Indicates whether the limit set for the amplitude ripple can be ach- Limit OK, Read only -
ieved by the linearity precorrector. Limit
Unreachable
If the selected limit is too low, a warning is displayed. In this case,
the precorrector will retain the curve last calculated.
Group Delay Indicates whether the limit set for the group delay can be achieved Limit OK, Read only -
by the linearity precorrector. Limit
Unreachable
If the selected limit is too low, a warning is displayed. In this case,
the precorrector will retain the curve last calculated.
Status Shows the status of the linear precorrector. Idle, Acquisi- Read only -
● Idle tion, Calcula-
The precorrector is not active. tion
● Acquisition
The precorrector is currently recording new measurement val-
ues.
● Calculation
The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection
curve.
Slope Shows the asymmetry compensation caused by the RF cable used ‒1 dB to 1 dB Maintenance Yes
between the RF test point downstream of the output filter and the
input of the linear precorrector.
The setting can be changed here.
Reset Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new Maintenance No
precorrection curve is calculated.
Test Signal (Non- Generates signals with different modulation in order to increase the Black, Grey, Maintenance No
linear Extension) video S/N ratio using an external measuring instrument. Measure- White, Off
ment of the video S/N ratio and adjustment of the associated slopes
allows the S/N ratio to be optimized for various picture contents.
Black Slope (Non- Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at high levels. ‒50 % to Maintenance Yes
linear Extension) 50 %
The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is
in "Stop" mode and the test signal "Black" has been activated.
Gray Slope (Non- Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at medium levels. ‒50 % to Maintenance Yes
linear Extension) 50 %
The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is
in "Stop" mode and the test signal "Gray" has been activated.
White Slope (Non- Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at low levels. ‒50 % to Maintenance Yes
linear Extension) 50 %
The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is
in "Stop" mode and the test signal "White" has been activated.
Phase Correction Indicates whether the sound phase shifter for carrier 1 and carrier 2 Off, On Maintenance Yes
(FM Carrier 1/2) is switched on.
The setting can be changed here.
Trigger Point 1/2 Shows the position defined for the respective onset point of the 0 % to 100 % Maintenance Yes
(FM Carrier 1/2) phase shifter (referenced to modulation of the picture signal).
The setting can be changed here.
Slope 1/2 (FM Shows the value that has been set for the slope at the respective ‒50 % to Maintenance Yes
Carrier 1/2) onset point of the phase shifter. 50 %
The setting can be changed here.
● Free‑wheeling mode
Here the transmit frequency is formed from a temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crys-
tal oscillator (TCXO).
The frequency stability is sufficient for continuous operation in multiple-frequency
networks (MFN).
● Operation with reference frequency
Here the transit frequency is stabilized by means of a reference frequency. The fol-
lowing possibilities are available:
– External 10 MHz reference frequency
– External PPS (pulse per second)
– Built-in GPS receiver
The frequency stability and frequency accuracy which can be achieved in this way
fulfill the increased requirements for operation of the transmitter in single-frequency
networks. If several reference signals are available at the same time, automatic
selection of the most suitable reference frequency is possible.
If the reference signal fails, the transmitter switches over to Holdover Mode and fre-
quency control operates with the accuracy of the temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crystal
oscillator (OXCO).
Since, in Holdover Mode, frequency control becomes increasingly inaccurate over
time, the output signal of the exciter can be switched off after a configurable Guard
Time.
In the case of reference signals with major fluctuations (jitter), e.g. with non‑controlled
external GPS receivers, a jitter correction function can be activated.
For measuring purposes, the used reference signal or one of the reference signals pro-
cessed internally in the exciter can be output via the Monitor Out socket (X24).
Ext. 10 MHz Indicates whether an external 10 MHz reference is present at the No Signal, Read only -
(Input) REF_IN socket (X64) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK
Source (Input) The suitable signal source for the frequency reference can be either Manual, Ext. Read only -
detected automatically or preselected in this list. If multiple signal 5 MHz, Ext.
sources are connected simultaneously for "Auto", an external refer- 10 MHz, Ext.
ence is selected in preference to the internal GPS. With "Manual", PPS, Int. PPS
the internal crystal oscillator (OCXO) is calibrated manually and the GPS, Auto
transmitter can be operated completely without an external refer-
ence source (not suitable for single-frequency networks).
Ext PPS (Input) Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
socket (X23) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK
Current Source Shows the signal source currently being used for frequency regula- Manual, Ext. Read only -
(input) tion. 5 MHz, Ext.
10 MHz, Ext.
PPS, Int.
GPS
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
(Input) pulse per second (PPS). This function must have been enabled Inaccurate,
beforehand by installing an option key. OK
Manual OCXO Enables manual adjustment of the internal crystal oscillator. To allow 0 to 65535 Maintenance No
(Regulator) this, a frequency counter which is synchronized via a highly accurate
reference must be connected via the monitor output.
Reference (Regu- Shows the state of the reference used. In single-frequency net- Fault, Warn- Read only -
lator) works, a failure of the reference can cause a malfunction and thus ing, OK
lead to switchover of the exciter.
Freq. Stability Shows the frequency accuracy of the regulator. The highest possible Unknown, Read only -
(Regulator) accuracy ("Excellent") is only reached at least 24 hours after switch- Inaccurate,
ing on the exciter. This ensures that if the reference fails, there are Good, Excel-
no faults in single-frequency networks before the guard time runs lent
out.
Monitor Out (regu- Used to select the signal to be output at the Monitor Out socket Off, Internal 5 Operation Yes
lator) (X24). MHz, Internal
10 MHz,
COFDM Sync (only with DAB): Outputs a sync pulse at the begin-
Internal 1
ning of a COFDM frame. The length of the interval depends on the
PPS, Internal
DAB transmission mode.
1 PPS GPS,
Current
Source,
(COFDM
Sync)
COFDM Sync Outputs a sync pulse via socket X27 at the beginning of a COFDM Off, On Operation Yes
(Regulator) frame. The length of the interval depends on the DAB transmission
mode.
On Ref. Fail Mute Used to define the behavior if the reference source fails. Never, At Maintenance Yes
(Regulator) ● "Never": Muting never takes place. This causes faults in single- Startup, After
frequency networks, especially after power failures. Guard Time
● "At Startup": After a power failure, muting takes place until the
regulator is synchronized. If the reference fails, the transmitter
will continue running as long as possible.
● "After Guard Time": Muting takes place not only after power fail-
ures, but also after failure of the reference and expiry of the set
Guard Time.
Guard Time (Reg- This value defines for how many hours the signal processing should 0 hours to Maintenance Yes
ulator) continue running without synchronization if the reference connection 24 hours
fails. The Guard Time is active only if the "Freq Stability" was "Good"
at the time of the failure. The longer the time selected is, the poorer
the accuracy of the transmitting frequency will become. In addition,
the time of signal transmission shifts. If this uses up the guard inter-
val, reception problems occur in single-frequency networks.
Jitter Correction When using an external reference source with high jitter, activating On, Off Maintenance Yes
(Guard Time) this function can provide better frequency stability. With "Good" ref-
erence signals, this function should be disabled as the regulator
takes significantly longer to attain its maximum frequency stability.
When the internal GPS is used, this function is enabled automati-
cally.
4.5 Standards
4.5.1 DVB‑T2
This function is used to set the DVB transmission parameters required for coding and
modulation and to check the used (TPS) settings (TPS = transmission parameter sig-
naling) that are signaled during transmission.
The network configuration parameters are used to set the higher‑level parameters for
DVB‑T2 that comply with the standard and are valid for all physical layer pipes (PLP).
The L1 frame information parameters are used to configure the "L1 post signaling".
The PLP parameters are used to make various settings for the possible PLPs. When
streaming via TS (TS Stream setting), the PLP parameters can be configured for
exactly one PLP. If, however, T2MI is active (T2MI = On), several PLPs from the T2MI
information can be configured automatically. To display the settings of a certain PLP,
the corresponding ID must be entered in the "Viewed PLP" column.
Some of the parameters can only be changed if "Network Interface" is set to "TS
Stream" in the transmitter. If "Network Interface" is set to "T2 MI Stream", the parame-
ters are set via the DVB‑T2 gateway.
DVB‑T2 Lite
To operate the transmitter in DVB‑T2 Lite mode, an appropriate software option must
be activated using an option key.
The DVB‑T2 Lite profile is based on the DVB‑T2 standard with certain parameters
removed and a number of specific additions made that are specifically relevant to
mobile reception. The Lite profile has been optimized for the use of inexpensive mobile
receivers with low energy consumption, but can also be received using conventional
DVB‑T2 receivers. This is achieved by reducing the range of functions of DVB‑T2,
thereby significantly reducing the complexity of the respective receiver modules.
The DVB‑T2 Lite profile is set via an upstream DVB‑T2 gateway and activated auto-
matically in the exciter.
Multi Profile
The "Multi Profile" function enables payloads with different modulation modes to be
transmitted simultaneously via one transmitter. For example, a program with low com-
pression can be transmitted as a DVB‑T2 profile, and the same program can be simul-
taneously transmitted with reduced resolution and highly compressed using a
DVB‑T2 Lite profile to enable reception with mobile devices. The data stream is gener-
ated in an upstream DVB‑T2 gateway.
If the "Multi Profile" function is active, all coder parameters, with the exception of set-
tings for the shared input data buffer, are available for each profile separately as
"Coder Main" and "Coder Sub". An overview of the two profiles is shown in the "Coder
Composite" menu.
The generation of PRBS test sequences is not possible in combination with "Multi Pro-
file". If this test mode is activated, the system automatically switches over to "Single
Profile".
To operate the transmitter in DVB‑T2 MISO mode, an appropriate software option must
be activated using an option key.
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter A or B > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > Net-
work Configuration
Network Interface Shows the set transport stream (input data stream). TS Stream, Maintenance Yes
(Base Settings) ● TS Stream: Uses the incoming MPEG transport stream directly T2 MI Stream
as the payload for an individual PLP transmission.
● T2 MI Stream: Uses the incoming T2‑MI stream of a DVB‑T2
gateway to configure the modulator.
The setting can be changed here.
Profile (Base Set- Indicates whether the exciter generates a DVB‑T2 or DVB‑T2 Lite T2 Base, T2 Read only -
tings) signal. The profile is selected via an external gateway. Base Lite
T2 MI Packet ID Shows the packet ID of the selected T2‑MI elementary stream. 0 to 8191 Maintenance Yes
(T2 MI) The setting can be changed here if Network Interface has been set
to T2 MI Stream.
T2 MI Stream ID Shows the stream ID of the selected T2‑MI elementary stream. 0 to 7 Maintenance Yes
(T2 MI) The setting can be changed here if Network Interface has been set
to "T2 MI Stream" and the DVB‑T2 version is greater than 1.2.1. The
DVB‑T2 version is shown in the "L1 Frame Information" menu.
Config Adaption Defines adaptation of the processing to the configuration at the None, Static Maintenance Yes
(T2 MI) input. Sing. PLP
● None:
This setting can always be used; it does, however, significantly
increase the signal transit time (Processing Delay) through the
transmitter.
● Static Single PLP:
This setting can only be used if the data stream only contains
one PLP (physical layer pipe). It reduces the signal transit time
(Processing Delay) through the exciter.
Config Adaption If the T2MI interface and a T2MI config adaption are used, this Not Used, Read only -
Status (T2 MI) parameter indicates whether a suitable configuration is available. Invalid Con-
● Not Used: figuration, OK
Config adaption is not used.
● Invalid Configuration:
Config adaption is used but the data stream contains more than
one PLP (physical layer pipe).
● OK:
Config adaption is successfully applied.
Dejitter Buffer (T2 Shows the initial size of the dejitter buffer in the case of T2MI feed. 0 ms to Maintenance Yes
MI) The dejitter buffer is reset when various events occur (e.g. the active 1000 ms
input is switched over, feed faults occur, the configuration is
changed or the SFN is set up). Its size changes constantly during
operation. The current size is shown in the "SFN Regulation" menu.
The setting can be changed here if "Network Interface" is set to "T2
MI Stream". If the "Seamless Switching" function is used, the set
value must be greater than the "Delay between Inputs" (shown in
the "Input Automatic" menu).
Time Interleaver If the T2MI interface is used, this parameter indicates the state of Unused, Read only -
Buffer (T2MI) the time interleaver memory. Underflow,
● Unused: OK
The T2MI interface is not active (e.g. TS feed or PRBS test sig-
nal).
● Underflow:
Not enough data was present in the time interleaver memory.
An automatic reset is performed. A high jitter on the signal feed
may have caused the problem. Setting a higher value for the
dejitter buffer may help.
● OK:
The memory can be used correctly.
Mode (Transmis- Shows the set transmission system. SISO, MISO, Maintenance Yes
sion System) ● SISO: (single input, single output) SISO LITE,
The signal is broadcast by one transmitter only. MISO LITE
● MISO: (multiple input, single output)
The signal is broadcast by multiple transmitters that are alloca-
ted to different MISO groups (SISO LITE or MISO LITE).
The settings can be changed here if Network Interface has been set
to TS Stream.
MISO Source Indicates whether the MISO group is to be selected manually or Off, Manual, Maintenance Yes
(Transmission automatically. IA
System) The MISO group can be set either manually directly at the transmit-
ter or automatically using the "Individual Addressing (IA)" data via
the DVB‑T2 gateway.
The setting can be changed here at any time without signal interrup-
tion if "T2 MI Stream" was selected under Network Interface and the
DVB-T2 gateway signals MISO mode.
MISO Group Shows the set MISO group. Unused, Maintenance Yes
(Transmission Group1,
The setting can be changed here, provided that Network Interface
System) Group2
has been set to TS Stream and MISO mode has been activated.
Used Source Shows the option selected for the MISO group. Off, Manual, Read only -
(Transmission IA
System)
Used Group Shows the set MISO group. Group1, Read only -
(Transmission Group2,
System) Unused
No of PLPs Shows the number of physical layer pipes (PLPs) present in the data 1 to 16 Read only -
(Frame Structure) stream.
Coderate (Frame Shows the set code rate. 1/2 (3/5, 2/3, Maintenance Yes
Structure) 3/4, 5/6)
The setting can be changed here. Currently, only the setting "1/2"
is permitted. 2/5, 1/3 (only
with DVB‑T2
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
Lite)
gateway.
If the software option for the "DVB‑T2 Lite" mode is used, the code
rates 2/5 and 1/3 can also be selected.
AUX Streams Shows the number of auxiliary streams present in the data stream. 0 to 15 Read only -
(Frame Structure)
T2 Frames/Super- Indicates how many T2 frames make up one superframe. 0 to 255 Maintenance Yes
frame (Frame If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
Structure) gateway.
Repetition (Frame Indicates whether repetition of the "preamble information" is No, Yes Maintenance Yes
Structure) switched on or off.
The information in the "preambles" of two successive T2 frames can
be repeated in order to attain greater stability for the dynamic portion
of the L1 post‑signaling. The use of this function is defined by this
parameter.
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
Data Symbols/ Indicates how many data symbols make up one T2 frame. 0 to 4095 Maintenance Yes
Frame (Frame The setting can be changed here.
Structure)
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
L1 Post Scramble Indicates whether the L1 post extension is present in the data Off, On Read only -
(Frame Structure) stream.
FFT Length Shows the number of single carriers onto which the T2 signal is to 1K, 2K, 4K, Maintenance Yes
(Frame Modula- be modulated. 8K, 16K, 32K
tion) The number can be set here.
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
Extended FFT Indicates whether additional carriers at the channel boundaries are No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Frame Modula- also to be used. If this function is enabled, the information data rate
tion) increases, but the spectrum becomes broader, increasing the risk of
interference in adjacent channels.
The function can be switched off here.
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
Guard Interval Shows the set guard interval between two T2 symbols. 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, Maintenance Yes
(Frame Modula- 1/32, 1/64,
The setting can be changed here.
tion) 1/128,
A long guard interval allows a long distance between the transmit- 19/128,
ters in an SFN. At the same time, however, it decreases the informa- 19/256
tion data rate.
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
Bandwidth (Frame Shows the defined channel bandwidth as it is reported via the L1 1.7 MHz, Read only -
Modulation) signaling by the DVB‑T2 gateway. 5 MHz,
6 MHz,
For security reasons, this value is not processed further automati-
7 MHz,
cally, but must be entered manually. A warning is given in case of an
8 MHz
inconsistency.
(10 MHz only
on request)
Used Bandwidth Shows the channel bandwidth occupied by the DVB‑T2 signal in the 1.7 MHz, Maintenance Yes
(Frame Modula- frequency spectrum. 5 MHz,
tion) 6 MHz,
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this setting
7 MHz,
is ALWAYS made manually for this transmitter.
8 MHz
(10 MHz only
on request)
Pilot Pattern Shows the used pilot pattern. PP1, PP2, Maintenance Yes
(Frame Modula- PP3, PP4,
The setting can be changed here.
tion) PP5, PP6,
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2 PP7, PP8
gateway.
PAPR Reduction Indicates which peak‑to‑average power ratio (PAPR) is set. None, ACE, Maintenance Yes
(Frame Modula- TR, ACE/TR
The setting can be changed here.
tion)
The efficiency of the transmitter can be increased by reducing power
peaks.
Active Constellation Extension (ACE) achieves this effect by shifting
the constellation points outward.
Tone Reservation (TR): Additional information that lowers the PAPR
is added to the signal via individual subcarriers. Both techniques can
be combined with each other. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value
is predefined by the DVB‑T2 gateway.
"Localization" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter A or B > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder >
Localization
Network ID (Iden- Shows the currently used network ID that is defined as a unique ID 0 to 65535 Read only -
tification) for the current DVB network.
If a DVB‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway, otherwise this value can be set directly at the transmitter.
System ID (Identi- Shows the currently used system ID that is defined as a unique ID 0 to 65535 Read only -
fication) for the current T2 network within the DVB network (uniquely identifi-
able via NETWORK_ID).
TX/IA Status Indicates whether settings from the "Individual Addressing" parame- Not Used, Read only -
(Identification) ters of the data stream are used and whether they are actually avail- Not Availa-
able in the data stream. ble, OK
Source (Cell ID) Shows the source from which the currently set cell ID originates. Manual, L1, Maintenance Yes
IA
The cell ID enables the receiver to identify a DVB‑T2 cell. The value
can be set either directly at the transmitter (= manual) or via the data
stream of the T2 gateway. The cell ID can be taken either from the
"L1 Frame Information" or the "Individual Addressing (IA)" data.
Manual (Cell ID) Shows the cell ID that was manually set directly at the transmitter. 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
The value can be changed here. For this setting to be effective,
"Source" must be set to "Manual". The cell ID can be changed at
any time without the signal being interrupted.
Used Source (Cell Indicates which data source is used for the cell ID. Manual, L1, Read only -
ID) IA
If a TS feed is used, the cell ID must always be set manually at the
transmitter. If a T2‑MI feed is used, the data source must be
selected using the "Source" parameter.
Used (Cell ID) Shows the cell ID that identifies the transmitter to the receiver. 0 to 65535 Read only -
Source (L1 Fre- Indicates which data source has been selected for the frequency off- Manual, L1 Maintenance Yes
quency) set signaled via the L1 layer.
"L1" usually has to be selected here for a feed using the T2-MI inter-
face. The frequency offset can also be set manually for testing pur-
poses. With TS feed, the frequency offset can only be set manually.
Manual (L1 Fre- Shows the manually set L1 frequency offset. 0 to Maintenance Yes
quency) 2000000000
This value can be changed here.
Used (L1 Fre- Shows the used frequency offset. 0 to Read only -
quency) 2000000000
This value is added to the set RF frequency in the "Output" menu of
the exciter.
Source (TX Delay Shows the selected data source for a transmitter‑specific offset of IA, Off Read only -
Offset) the time of transmission.
If the T2‑MI interface is used, the value can be either taken from the
IA parameters or deactivated. This function is not available if a TS
feed is used.
TX Delay Offset Shows the transmitter‑specific transmission delay taken from IA ‒3276.8 µs Read only -
(TX Delay Offset) parameters, provided that the "TX Delay Offset" function is activa- to 3276.8 µs
ted.
"PLP" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter A or B > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > PLP
Parameters
FEC Shows the set error correction algorithm (FEC). 16k LDPC, Maintenance Yes
64k LDPC
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
PLP Type Shows the set PLP type. Common, Maintenance Yes
Type 1, Type
The setting can be changed here.
2
No of PLPs Shows the number of physical layer pipes (PLPs) present in the data 1 to 16 Read only -
stream.
Group ID Shows the PLP group within the T2 system to which the displayed 0 to 255 Maintenance Yes
physical layer pipe (PLP) is linked.
This value can be changed here. This enables a receiver to link the
data PLP to the corresponding common PLP that has the same PLP
group ID.
FEC Blocks Shows the maximum number of FEC blocks that can be received 0 to 1023 Read only -
per interleaving frame.
Time Interleaver Shows the selected time interleaver type. Single, Multi Maintenance Yes
Type The following settings are possible here:
● Single:
One interleaving frame contains exactly one T2 frame (one or
more TI blocks in the interleaving frame).
● Multi:
One interleaving frame contains one or more T2 frames (one
interleaving frame contains just one TI block).
PLP Increment/ Shows the selected physical layer pipe (PLP). Read/write -
Decrement The desired value can be selected from the PLP list using the incre-
ment and decrement buttons.
Payload Type Shows the format of the input PLP. Each input PLP can process the TS, GSE, Read only -
following formats: GCS, GFPS
● TS (transport stream)
● GSE (generic encapsulated stream)
● GCS (generic continuous stream)
GCS is a data stream of variable length in which the modulator
interface does not know the limits in the data stream.
● GFPS (generic fixed‑length packetized stream)
GFPS is a data stream with fixed packet length. This format
ensures compatibility with DVB‑S. GSE is the preferred format.
Coderate Shows the set code rate. 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, Maintenance Yes
3/4, 4/5, 5/6
The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to <error
correction values + information data>. 1/2 provides the greatest
error correction and the lowest data transfer rate; 5/6 provides the
lowest error correction and the greatest data transfer rate.
The setting can be changed here.
Time Interleaver Shows the set time interleaver length. 0 to 255 Maintenance Yes
Length The meaning of this parameter varies depending on the setting
under Time Interleaver Type:
● for Time Interleaver Type = Single:
Time Interleaver Length indicates the number of TI blocks per
interleaving frame.
● for Time Interleaver Type = Multi:
Time Interleaver Length indicates the number of T2 frames into
which an interleaving frame is divided.
The setting can be changed here.
Rotated Indicates whether rotation is set for the constellation. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
If the constellation is rotated, the robustness of the signal to interfer-
ence increases.
The setting can be changed here.
Baseband Mode Shows the set efficiency. Nrm. Effi- Maintenance Yes
ciency, High
High Efficiency: certain, normally unused bytes in the data stream
Efficiency
are used for information data transmission. This mode is not suppor-
ted by all receiver instruments.
The setting can be changed here.
"PAPR/FEF" parameters
The PAPR function is only active if the corresponding software option is installed.
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter A or B > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder >
PAPR/FEF
PAPR Reduction Shows the selected function for reduction of the crest factor. A cor- No, TR, L1- Maintenance Yes
(Peak to Average responding software option must be installed in order to activate this ACE/P2-TR,
Power Ratio) function. L1-ACE/TR
The following settings are possible here:
● No
Only available with DVB‑T2 version 1.1.1.
Switches off crest factor reduction.
● TR
Only available with DVB‑T2 version 1.1.1.
Switches on crest factor reduction (peak‑to‑average power ratio
reduction through tone reservation).
● L1-ACE/P2-TR
Only available with DVB‑T2 version > 1.1.1.
Minimizes the effect of crest factor reduction by using just one
iteration. At the same time, ACE (Active Constellation Exten-
sion) is active in the DVB‑T2 coder.
● L1-ACE/TR
Only available with DVB‑T2 version > 1.1.1.
Activates crest factor reduction using the settings for "Clipping
Threshold" and "Iterations" that are predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway. At the same time, ACE (Active Constellation Exten-
sion) is active in the DVB‑T2 coder.
TR Clipping Shows the limit up to which the PAPR‑TR algorithm operates. The Variable Read only -
Threshold (Peak displayed value divided by 100 roughly corresponds to the desired
to Average Power crest factor in dB.
Ratio)
TR Iterations Sup- Shows the maximum number of tone reservation repetitions that are Variable Read only -
ported (Peak to supported by the currently selected Bandwidth, FFT and Guard
Average Power Interval settings.
Ratio)
Iterations Active Shows the number of tone reservation repetitions that are actually Variable Read only -
(Peak to Average performed per symbol.
Power Ratio)
TR Iterations IA Shows the number of tone reservation repetitions signaled by IA. 0 to 1023 Read only -
TR Iterations Indicates whether the number of tone reservation repetitions have No, Yes Read only -
Reduced (Peak to been reduced compared to the number signaled by IA.
Average Power
Ratio)
Future Extension Indicates whether future extension frames are used. No, Yes Read only -
Frame (Transmis-
sion System)
Type (Transmis- Shows the type of the associated FEF part as a digit. 0 to 15 Read only -
sion System)
Length (Transmis- Shows the length of the used FEF part as the number of periods T 0 to 1677215 Read only -
sion System) from the beginning of the P1 symbol of the FEF part to the beginning (= 224‒1)
of the P1 symbol of the next T2 frame.
Interval (Trans- Shows the number of T2 frames between two FEF parts. 0 to 255 Read only -
mission System)
DVB T2 Configu- Indicates whether the configuration of the DVB‑T2 parameters is Undefined, Read only -
ration consistent. No, Yes
If a fault occurs, a message is output as to whether a fault is present
in the settings or the selected configuration is not supported by this
exciter.
T2-MI Stream Indicates whether there is a fault in the T2‑MI stream. OK, Not OK Read only -
A fault is an indication that the modulator settings are inconsistent
and are not suitable for the settings that are signaled via the trans-
port stream. First check the signal quality of the T2‑MI feed. If this
problem persists, contact the Service department.
DVB-T2 Coder Indicates whether the selected modulation mode is supported by the Supported, Read only -
Mode exciter. Not Suppor-
ted
Bandwidth Indicates whether the configuration of the channel bandwidth is con- Off, No, Yes Read only -
sistent. If not, a fault message is output.
Generate Test Indicates which test signal is generated. Off, PRBS, Maintenance No
Signal ● Off Mute 1st P1
Switches off test signal generation. Symbol
● PRBS
Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload. "Multi
Profile" is deactivated automatically.
● Mute 1st P1 Symbol
Suppresses the first symbol of each T2 frame. This function can
be used to measure the time of signal transmission.
● Single Carrier
Generates an unmodulated single carrier.
The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band
and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the
synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF
Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out
(X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this
test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
The selection can be changed here.
Testmode Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel center frequency
must be set during this process.
With DTV, the output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be
attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
TS feed
Every exciter which is suitable for the transmission of digital TV has two transport
stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). The data format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can be set
separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also dis-
played.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
IP feed
Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-
able in the exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned
an IP address in the Task View > Inputs > TX > Exciter > TS LAN menu. The two
Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams which contain additional configu-
ration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast and multicast streams. For multi-
cast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which makes the stream available in
the network must also be specified. It is possible to assign both logical IP streams to
the same physical socket, but to specify different multicast addresses. This provides
maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy scenarios in the feed path.
The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the Inputs/TS LAN task
and only become effective after the exciter has been rebooted.
The description of the parameters is given in ""IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
Sat feed
A satellite receiver module is available as an option for the exciter. It contains two inde-
pendent receivers. Each receiver has a common interface slot that allows the signal to
be decoded. The receivers can be used directly as logical inputs in the exciter. Alterna-
tively, an additional instrument with IP or ASI input can be looped in between the satel-
lite receivers and the signal inputs of the coder.
The decoded transport stream of one of the two satellite receivers can be output via
ASI connector X400. Optionally, both satellite receivers can be used independently of
each other as multicast servers via the Ethernet connector (X200). For this purpose,
one of the two multicast addresses of the satellite receiver modules must be set at the
additional instrument.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Sat Tuner" parameters" on page 121
DVB‑T/DVB‑T2 feed
A DVBT‑T/DVB‑T2 receiver module is optionally available for the exciter. Up to two
modules can be installed in an exciter. The receivers can be used directly as logical
inputs in the exciter. For the TLU9, it is possible to use a receiver module for monitor-
ing the output signal.
Software option K25 must be installed in order to use a receiver module as a monitor-
ing receiver. The option is available for the TLU9.
Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream, IP Stream, Sat and Receiver)
This menu is only available if a TS feed has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if an IP feed has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
(Status) via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Status)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Status)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate of the multiplex contained in the IP Read only -
(Status) stream.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
FEC Row (D) Shows the number of rows in the matrix used for calculating the for- Read only -
(Status) ward error correction.
FEC Col (L) (Sta- Shows the number of columns in the matrix used for calculating the Read only -
tus) forward error correction.
FEC Row valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
FEC Col valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
(Settings) stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal
switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol (Settings) Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Maintenance Yes
(Settings) ● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the Unicast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Port (Settings) Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
IP Address (Set- Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
tings) mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Maintenance Yes
(Settings) entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Transponder Fre- Shows the set frequency of the satellite transponder if Ku band or 10700 MHz to Maintenance Yes
quency (Configu- C band has been selected for LNB mode (parameter "Band"). 12750 MHz
ration) The setting can be changed here. If the parameter "Band" has been
set to "Manual", the intermediate frequency (IF) is shown in MHz.
Band (Configura- Indicates the band in which the LNB is operating. Ku, C, Manual Maintenance Yes
tion) The setting can be changed here. This parameter determines how
the selected intermediate frequency (IF) is calculated for the DVB‑S
or DVB‑S2 tuner.
● In Ku band mode, two LNB frequencies must be entered (high
and low). The tuner automatically selects the appropriate fre-
quency band and switches on the 22 kHz tone if the higher fre-
quency band is to be used.
● In C band mode, only one LNB frequency is used. The 22 kHz
tone can be activated manually.
● If the parameter "Manual" is set, the intermediate frequency (IF)
at which the tuner is to operate can be entered directly in the
"Transponder Frequency" field.
Polarization (LNB) Shows the set polarization of the LNB. Horizontal, Maintenance Yes
Vertical
The setting can be changed here. If the LNB supply voltage ("Volt-
age") is set to Off, this parameter has no effect.
Voltage (LNB) Shows the set supply voltage for the LNB. Off, 13 V and Maintenance Yes
18 V, 14 V
The setting can be changed here. The supply voltage for switching
and 19 V
over the polarization can be increased by approx. 1 V in order to
compensate for any voltage losses along the RF cable to the LNB.
LNB Freq Low Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 9300 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) lower frequency band (Ku band only). 10200 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at.
The lower standard frequency of most LNBs is 9750 MHz.
LNB Freq High Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 10200 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) upper frequency band (Ku band only). 11000 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at. Switchover to the upper fre-
quency band is triggered by activation of a 22 kHz tone.
The upper standard frequency of most LNBs is 10600 MHz.
LNB Freq (LNB) Shows the set frequency of the local oscillator for the LNB in MHz Maintenance Yes
(C band only).
The standard frequency of most LNBs is 5150 MHz.
22kHz Tone Used to switch between the two oscillators of the LNB (C band and Off, On Maintenance Yes
(LNB) Manual only).
Tuner Frequency Shows the intermediate frequency (IF) of the tuner in MHz. This is 950 MHz to Read only -
(Tuner) the current value including all frequency offsets. 2150 MHz
Receive Power Shows the current receive power in dBm. ‒10 dBm to ‒ Read only -
(Tuner) 70 dBm
Locked (Tuner) Indicates whether the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver has synchronized Read only -
with a signal.
Drift (Drift) Shows the difference between the set transponder frequency and Read only -
the frequency of the received signal (Tuner Frequency).
Warning Limit If the difference between the receive and transponder frequency is Maintenance Yes
(Drift) greater than this limit, a warning is generated.
Status (Drift) Shows a warning if the receive frequency deviates too greatly from OK, Too High Read only -
the transponder frequency.
"Demodulator" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > Demodulator
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Coderate (Coding) Shows the current FEC code rate of the receive signal. Read only -
Bit Error Rate Shows the current bit error rate. Read only -
(Coding)
Modulation (Cod- Shows the determined modulation mode of the receive signal. QPSK, 8PSK, Read only -
ing) Unknown
TS Datarate mea- Shows the measured data rate of the transport stream in bit/s. Read only -
sured (Status)
Symbolrate (Sig- Indicates whether the symbol rate is to be determined automatically Auto, Manual Maintenance Yes
nal) or set manually. The setting can be changed here.
TS Symbol Rate Shows the set symbol rate of the expected receive signal. 0 ksymbols/ Maintenance Yes
(Signal) sec to
The setting can be changed here if "Symbol Rate" is set to "Man-
50000 ksym-
ual". If "0" is entered, the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver performs a
bols/sec
"blind search" and attempts to determine all signal parameters auto-
matically.
Signal Type (Sig- Shows the signal type (or standard) setting for the expected receive DVB-S, DVB- Maintenance Yes
nal) signal. S2, Auto
The setting can be changed here.
Standard (Signal) Shows the determined TV standard of the receive signal. DVB-S, DVB- Read only -
S2
C/N (C/N) Shows the current carrier‑to‑noise ratio. OK, Too Low Read only -
A low carrier‑to‑noise ratio can cause bit errors during demodula-
tion.
Warning Limit If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a warning is dis- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(C/N) played.
Fault Limit (C/N) If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a fault is displayed. 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Status (C/N) Indicates whether the current signal‑to‑noise ratio is below or above Read only -
the set limit.
Link Margin (Link Shows the difference between the receiver sensitivity (i.e. the Read only -
Margin) receive power at which the receiver stops operating) and the current
receive power.
A link margin of 15 dB means that the system can tolerate an addi-
tional attenuation of 15 dB between the transmitter and receiver
before it stops operating.
Warning Limit If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a warning is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(Link Margin) gered. The threshold value can be changed here.
Fault Limit (Link If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a fault is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Margin) gered. This can cause the active input of the exciter to switch over.
The threshold value can be changed here.
Status (Link Mar- Indicates whether the signal attenuation is low enough to ensure OK, Too Low, Read only -
gin) smooth operation. The threshold values as of which a warning or Fail
fault is displayed can be changed.
PLS Code 1 to 3 Shows the decryption code valid for this data stream. The code and 0 to 262143 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- PL scrambling must be the same as the values set at the scrambler
bling) in the playout. Up to three different codes can be used. If "Loop" is
activated, these codes are automatically checked for validity. The
setting can be changed here. For PLS = Gold, the valid value range
is: 0 to 262143.
PLS Mode (Pay- Indicates the form in which the polynomial for decoding the data Root, Gold Maintenance Yes
load Scrambling) stream from the displayed code is to be calculated.
The setting can be changed here.
Physical layer scrambling is disabled if PL Scrambling is set to
"Gold" and Code is set to "0".
Loop (Payload Activates the automatic check to establish which of the max. three Disable, Maintenance Yes
Scrambling) PLS codes can be used to decode the data stream. Enable
PLS Selector Used to select which of the three set PLS codes is to be used. This 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- setting is available if automatic checking of the PLS codes is
bling) switched off ("Loop = Disable").
Status (Payload Indicates the PLS code used to decode the data stream. 1, 2, 3 Read only -
Scrambling)
"CAM" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > CAM
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
CAM inserted Indicates whether a CAM is installed (CAM = Conditional Access No, Yes Read only -
(Status) Module).
TS Input (Status) Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the input Off, On Read only -
of the conditional access module.
CAM Status (Sta- Shows the current status of the condition access module. Off, On, No Read only -
tus) ● Off: CAM has been deactivated. Module, No
● On: CAM is operating. Signal, No
● No Module: No CAM is installed. Key, Need
● No Signal: No transport stream has been detected at the input MMI
of the CAM.
● No Key: No valid decryption key is programmed for the CAM.
● Need MMI: A problem has occurred that can only be rectified
using an external module reader.
TS Output (Sta- Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the out- Off, On Read only -
tus) put of the conditional access module.
Manufacturer Shows the name of the conditional access module manufacturer. Read only -
Name (Status)
Module Name Shows the name of the conditional access module. Read only -
(Status)
Reset (Status) Indicates whether the conditional access module is to be automati- Manual, Auto- Maintenance Yes
cally reset in the event of malfunctions. The setting can be changed matically
here.
Reset CAM (Sta- In the event of malfunctions, the conditional access module can be Trigger Maintenance No
tus) reset manually by pressing a button.
Enable (Encryp- Used to define how the received content is to be encrypted. Off, CI, BISS Maintenance Yes
tion) ● Off: The content is received and transmitted unencrypted.
● CI: The content is decrypted by a conditional access module
(CAM) installed in the common interface (CI).
● BISS: The content is transmitted encrypted using a basic inter-
operable scrambling system (BISS).
BISS Mode Used to define how encryption is to be performed using the basic BISS E, BISS Maintenance Yes
(Encryption) interoperable scrambling system. BISS E uses the same encryption 1
algorithm as BISS 1, except that additional encryption of the session
word takes place. The session word is the key for decryption of the
transmitted data in the receiver.
● BISS 1: Encryption is performed using a session word (SW).
● BISS E: Encryption is performed using an encrypted session
word (ESW).
Injected ID (BISS) The receiver ID is the key of the receiver and is used to encrypt the Maintenance No
encrypted session word (ESW) in BISS E mode. The ESW can thus
be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured channel so that the
receiver can decrypt the receive signal again using its own receiver
ID.
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this key can
no longer be read after it has been entered.
Encrypted Ses- In BISS E mode, the encrypted session word is the key for decryp- Maintenance No
sion (BISS) tion of the transmitted data in the receiver. The encrypted session
word is encrypted using the key of the receiver (injected ID) and can
therefore be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured connec-
tion. The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this
key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
Clear Session In BISS 1 mode, the clear session word is the key for decryption of Maintenance No
(BISS) the transmitted data in the receiver. The clear session word itself is
unencrypted and should therefore be transmitted to the receiver via
a secure connection. The setting can be changed here. For security
reasons, this key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the coder OK, No Read only -
(Transport input by the SAT receiver module. If a fault is displayed, the settings Stream
Stream) of the SAT tuner should be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
T2-MI (MIP, SIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
(Transport contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
Stream) modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
TS ID Status (Mul- Indicates whether the data stream contains one or more transport Single Read only -
tistream) streams. With multistream reception, the number of the desired data Stream, Multi-
stream must be set under "Multistream Number". stream
Multistream Num- With multistream reception, the used TS is shown here. The setting Maintenance Yes
ber (Multistream) can be changed here.
TS ID Match Indicates whether the current TS ID matches the expected TS ID. If OK, Warning Read only -
(Transport Stream the transmitted TS ID changes, a warning is issued. If the expected
ID) TS ID is set to 0, the warning is suppressed.
Expected TS ID Indicates which TS ID is expected in the input signal. If the TS 0 to 16384 Maintenance Yes
(Transport Stream changes, a warning is issued. The warning can be suppressed if the
ID) "Expected TS ID" is set to 0.
Current TS ID Shows the ID of the currently used transport stream. With multi- Read only -
(Transport Stream stream operation, the multistream number defines the active TS.
ID)
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Service Name Shows the name of the service from the service description table Read only -
(SDT).
ID Shows the ID of the service from the program association table. 0 to 65535 Read only -
PMT PID Shows the ID of the service from the program map table.
Decrypt Indicates whether this service is decrypted by the CAM. Off, On Read only -
Scrambled Indicates whether the service is marked as encrypted in the service No, Yes Read only -
description table (SDT).
"BTS" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > BTS
This menu is only available for the TV standard "ISDB‑T" if a "Sat Input" has been
assigned to at least one logical input.
BTS Decompres- Indicates whether the packet length of the broadcast transport Off, On, Fault Read only -
sion (Status) stream (BTS) is changed from 188 bytes (DVB‑S/S2 standard) to
204 bytes (ISDB‑T standard). A valid option key (K60) must be
installed in order to use this function. A fault indicates a faulty trans-
port stream.
PLI Table PID Shows the packet ID which the PLI table in the DVB‑S/S2 stream 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
(PID Insertion) contains. The setting can be changed here.
Null Packet LA Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer A contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LB Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer B contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LC Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer C contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
RF Input Level Shows the current receive power in dBm. Read only -
(Signal Quality)
RF In (Signal Indicates whether a RF signal is detected at the input. Present, Not Read only -
Quality) Present
Demodulator (Sig- Indicates whether the demodulator is synchronized with the fre- Locked, Not Read only -
nal Quality) quency of the input signal. Locked
MER (MER) The modulation error ratio describes the signal quality. Read only -
A poor MER is caused by random shifting of the constellation points
in the constellation diagram. From a certain value, a receiver can no
longer cleanly distinguish the positions of the constellation points,
resulting in picture failure points.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the MER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(MER) the measured MER drops below the set threshold value, a warning
is issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
MER Status Indicates whether the measured MER is above or below the set Off, too low, Read only -
(MER) warning threshold. OK
BER (BER) The bit error rate is a measure for signal quality. Read only -
A high BER can be caused by e.g. a low signal‑to‑noise ratio.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the BER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(BER) the measured BER exceeds the set threshold value, a warning is
issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
BER Status (BER) Indicates whether the measured BER is above or below the set Off, Too High, Read only -
warning threshold. OK
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > Receiver > Transport
Stream
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
(Transport mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated Stream
Stream) here, the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
MIP (Transport Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
Stream) contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
PLP Number Shows the selected physical layer pipe. 0 -255 Maintenance
(PLP) The setting can be changed here.
Logical Input 1/2 Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independ- Variable Maintenance Yes
ently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is
possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The
selection options for the data sources are determined by the instal-
led input interfaces and option keys.
Multiplex 1/2 A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be Maintenance Yes
Name entered here.
ASI Out Indicates which of the two signals of the satellite receiver has been Off, Sat1, Maintenance No
switched to the ASI output (X25). The setting can be changed here. Sat2
This function is only available if a satellite receiver has been
selected for at least one logical input.
IP MUX 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP No Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
TS 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the TS feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the TS No Stream
Feed menu must be checked.
Receiver 1/2 Indicates whether a valid RF signal is being fed to the transmitter via Stream OK, Read only -
the receiver or monitor module. If a fault is indicated here, the set- No Stream
tings and displays in the Receiver and Monitor menu must be
checked.
Monitor Out For measuring purposes, any input signal can be switched to the Off, Active Maintenance No
TS Monitor Out socket (X22). The selection options for the data Input, Logical
sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option Input 1 or 2,
keys. TS Generator
Monitor Indicates which receiver module is used as the RF monitor. Off, Receiver Configuration No
1, Receiver 2
Only receiver modules which are not configured as "Logical Input"
can be selected. Changes to this settings only become effective
after the instrument has been rebooted.
This feature is available for the TLU9 if at least one receiver module
and option K25 are installed.
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input sig-
nal switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Port Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Uni- Maintenance Yes
● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the cast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
TS 1/2 Type Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21. Auto, ASI, Maintenance No
● Auto: The data format is detected automatically. SMPTE
● ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream.
● SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the IP feed. Read only -
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP/IIP/TCP+DB Depending on the selected TV standard, this indicates whether addi- Read only -
tional information for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN) is
present in the data stream.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the physical network interface of the IP Configuration No
feed. The IP address can be changed here. An IP address must also
be entered for multicast mode. Changes only become effective after
the exciter is restarted by pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
Network Mask Shows the network mask. The setting can be changed here. Configuration No
Changes only become effective after the exciter is restarted by
pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
MAC Address Shows the worldwide unique MAC address of the network interface. Read only -
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input and the IP output of the satellite receiver has been activated with option key K51.
Local IP Address Shows the logical network address of Ethernet connector X200 on Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) the satellite receiver board.
The decoded transport streams of both satellite receivers are output
via this connector.
The setting can be changed here.
Network Mask The network mask splits the IP address range into a network part Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) and an instrument part. The network masks of all computers in an
IP network should be configured the same.
MAC Address Shows the hardware address of the network adapter. It serves as a Read only -
(Monitor Out) unique ID for the instrument in a computer network.
Multicast Address The satellite receiver forwards the decrypted transport stream via IP Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) to external instruments that have subscribed to the displayed
address. The multicast address can be set separately for both satel-
lite receivers. Both data streams are output via Ethernet connector
X200.
Port (Monitor Out) Shows the UDP port to which the data stream is to be sent. 1025 to Maintenance No
65535
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Row (Monitor Shows the number of rows that are to be used for calculation of the 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Col (Monitor Shows the number of columns that are to be used for calculation of 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) the ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching
The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits
seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the
"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes
place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available
without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in
MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal
feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which
arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the
two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals
can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
Automatic (Con- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
figuration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Automatic (Con- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Read only -
figuration) ● Off: Changed
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● Active:
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only dis-
played if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, None
If "None" is set, both inputs have equal priority. This minimizes the
number of switching operations.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always
takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If "Seamless Switching" has been
set to "On" and is possible, switchover always takes place immedi-
ately without interruption regardless of the set guard time.
If "to Reserve Only" has been selected as the "Direction", the set
guard time has no effect.
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Not Possible, Read only -
Switching) Possible
"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different
data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set
"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals
with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes
place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard
Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Seamless (Seam- Activates seamless switching. If seamless switching is activated, Off/On Maintenance Yes
less Switching) "Guard Time Back" is changed to a minimum of 15 seconds.
Delay between Shows the delay time between logical input 1 and logical input 2 in 0 ms to Read only -
Inputs (Seamless ms. A positive value means that the signal at input 2 arrives later at 1000 ms
Switching) the exciter.
If Reserve Fails Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
(Reserve Control) monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Input (Selector) Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is ON, the preselected input is switched over.
"Settings" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Automatic> Settings
Mute on Input Fail Used to determine whether the output signal of the exciter is to be No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) switched off if the input signal of all available inputs fails, or whether
"null packets" are to be sent. This switch is available in multiple‑fre-
quency networks (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN),
the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal is fed.
Input Fail Detec- Indicates the speed of response to missing data packets. Normal: Normal, Fast Maintenance Yes
tion (Input Con- Bursts in the transport stream are processed without fault message
trol) (recommended setting for IP feed). Fast: This setting reduces the
response time to missing data packets. It can be selected if it is
ensured that there is a continuous data stream at the input of the
exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Detect Lost Pack- Indicates whether the monitoring of missing data packets is active. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
ets (Input Control) ● No
Single missing data packets are tolerated. Longer interruptions
of the data stream will, however, cause the input to switch over
or result in an "Input Fail".
● Yes
If the automatic input signal switchover function is ON, the
standby input becomes active as soon as a data packet is lost.
If the automatic input signal switchover function is OFF, a miss-
ing data packet will result in an "Input Fail".
The setting can be changed here.
Transparent TS Indicates whether the transport stream is routed transparently No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) through the coder or whether it can be modified during signal pro-
cessing.
● Off
Stuffing and PCR correction are active.
● On
Stuffing and PCR correction are OFF. The fed data rate must
match the required data rate.
This parameter is only available for the TV standard "DVB‑T" in
"MFN" mode and can be changed here.
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter No (Create Maintenance Yes
Changeover (On is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for Warning), Yes
Input Fail) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). (Create Fault)
● Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the
higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to
switch over to another exciter or transmitter.
● No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Fail Delay Used to set the length of the checkout time which must expire after 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(On Input Fail) detection of an input signal fault before the exciter displays a fault. If
a short checkout time is set, the system can quickly switch over to a
standby exciter if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long check-
out time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a fault to
switch to an alternative feed path so that the exciter is prevented
from switching over to a redundancy component.
For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the exciter has a function that allows
the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the SFN, time synchroni-
zation of all exciters in the network is performed using a pulse per second (PPS),
which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.
The TX delay offset is used to compensate for differences between transmitter sys-
tems from different manufacturers.
Settings
Ext. PPS (Input) Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
socket (X23) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK (please
check)
Source (Input) The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of transmission Ext. PPS, Maintenance -
can be selected in this list. Internal GPS
PPS
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
(Input) pulse per second (PPS). This function must have been enabled Inaccurate,
beforehand by installing an option key. OK (please
check)
SFN Sync Used to activate time synchronization. On (SFN), Off Maintenance Yes
● Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not controlled. (MFN)
● On (SFN): The time of transmission of a symbol is the same for
all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network (SFN).
PPS State Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized OK, Hold- Read only -
with the frequency control. over, Hold-
● OK: over expired,
The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency control. Missing, Not
● Holdover: Stated
The PPS and the reference frequency of the frequency control
have failed. Time synchronization is now performed with the
accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator (OCXO).
● Holdover Expired:
The maximum time for which the transmitter is permitted to
remain in holdover mode has expired (see the Frequency Con-
trol menu).
● Missing:
No PPS signal has been detected since the exciter was last
started.
● Not Stated:
The phase angle of the PPS is not monitored in MFN mode.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control
must be checked.
Timestamp State Indicates which type of timestamp information is present in the data None, Null, Read only -
stream Relative,
● None: Absolute,
Does not contain a timestamp. This causes the output signal to Multiple
be muted in SFN mode.
● Null:
Contains a null timestamp. This causes the output signal to be
muted in SFN mode.
● Relative:
Contains a timestamp relative to the pulse per second. Trans-
mission of the data packet will start at the beginning of the next
second.
● Absolute:
Contains an absolute timestamp. Transmission of the data
packet will start at the specified absolute time
● Multiple:
A relative and an absolute timestamp are present. The time of
transmission cannot be calculated. The corresponding settings
of the DVB‑T2 gateway must be corrected.
Max. Deviation Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the time of trans- 0µs to 100 μs Read only -
(Time of Dis- mission relative to the internally controlled reference frequency. If
patch) the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmission is recal-
culated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute).
SFN State (Time Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a SFN Resync, Read only -
of Dispatch) time‑synchronous manner. No Time
● In Time: Information,
The output signal is transmitted in a time‑synchronous manner. No Time Ref-
● SFN Resync: erence, In
SFN resynchronization is currently taking place. Time, Wrong
● No Time Information: SFN Time
No control information for the time of transmission is contained Setup, Wrong
in the data stream. Frequency
● No Time Reference: Reference
The reference feed of the time synchronization and the fre- Source, Multi-
quency control must be checked. ple Time
● Wrong SFN Time Setup:
Information,
The network delay is so high that the desired time of transmis-
Delay Unsup-
sion cannot be observed.
ported, Not
● Wrong Frequency Reference Source:
Stated
"Manual" has been selected as the frequency reference.
● Multiple Time Information:
A relative and an absolute timestamp are present in the input
data stream. The time of transmission cannot be calculated.
The corresponding settings of the DVB‑T2 gateway must be
corrected.
● Delay Unsupported:
The desired absolute time of transmission is too far in the
future. The required delay is not possible.
● Not Stated:
The time of transmission is not monitored in MFN mode.
Dejitter Buffer Shows the fill level of the dejitter buffer. This can change after acti- 0 s to 1 s Read only -
vation of the SFN due to the properties of the feed. This value
should always be positive so that transmission is not interrupted.
Processing Time Shows the internal transit time for signal processing in the exciter. It 0 s to 1 s Read only -
depends on the set modulation parameters.
Residual Timing Shows the delay necessary to reach the time of transmission. This 0 s to 4 s Read only -
Delay delay remains constant after activation of the SFN. In order to
increase the feed's resilience to jitter, the residual timing delay can
be decreased by increasing the dejitter buffer delay.
Total Delay Shows the total transit time of the signal through the transmitter. It is 0 s to 4 s Read only -
the sum of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
UTC Offset Shows the difference between UTC time and SI time when using ‒8192 to Read only -
absolute timestamps. UTC is the internal timebase of the exciter. SI 8191
time is used as the timebase in the DVB-T2 gateway. UTC time is
based on the varying rotation speed of the Earth, whereas SI time is
calculated using an atomic clock. Both time models are converted in
the exciter by means of the displayed offset. If no offset is displayed,
the DVB-T2 gateway does not support this function. The displayed
value should be +35 s (2014 status) and will likely increase over
time.
Static Delay Off- Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter 0 s to 1 s Maintenance Yes
set site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of trans-
mission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to
compensate for differences between transmission systems from dif-
ferent manufacturers.
TX Delay Offset Positive or negative offset (transmitted for the individual transmitter 0 s to 1 s Read only -
site in the T2MI) of the time of transmission relative to the regular
time of transmission. For activation, the TX delay must be enabled in
the Localization menu of the coder. If TX Delay Offset and Static
Delay are active at the same time, their effects are added together.
4.5.2 DVB-T
The DVB‑T transmission parameters required for coding and modulation as well as the
TPS settings (TPS = transmission parameter signaling) used and signaled during
transmission can be checked in the "Configuration" menu field.
The DVB‑T standard can be used both in single-frequency networks (SFN) and multi-
ple-frequency networks (MFN). In SFNs, the transmission signaling parameters (TSP)
are usually set automatically by the megaframe information packet (MIP); in MFNs, the
TPS parameters are usually set manually. The two variants DVB‑T and DVB‑H are
additionally available for both operating modes.
In the Localization menu, it is possible to define manually or automatically (via MIP) the
SFN cell to which this transmitter is to be assigned. To allow fine adjustment of sin-
gle‑frequency networks, a time and frequency offset from the data carousel of the MIP
can be set individually for each transmitter of the SFN via the central SAN adapter.
This is activated by setting TX Control to "On" and by defining a transmitter address
that is unique in the SAN.
In the "TPS Settings" menu, the TPS transmission parameters can be set manually
(only if TPS Source is set to Manual). The modulation parameters effective in the coder
are displayed under "Active TPS Settings" (all operating modes). In the DVB‑H TV
standard, a number of other transmission parameters are available.
"Configuration" parameters
These settings influence the availability of certain parameters in the Modulation menu.
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DVB‑T Coder > Configuration
TPS Source (Con- Shows the source set for the TPS parameters (TPS = transmission MIP, Manual Maintenance Yes
figuration) parameter signaling).
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB‑T2
gateway.
Modulation (Con- Shows the set digital TV standard. DVB-T, DVB- Maintenance Yes
figuration) H
The setting can be changed here.
Cell ID Source Shows the set data source of the cell ID. Off, MIP, Maintenance Yes
(Localization) Manual
The setting can be changed here. It is still possible to switch off sig-
naling of the cell ID here.
Manual Cell ID Shows a manually set cell ID. 0 to FFFF Maintenance Yes
(Localization) For the cell ID to become effective, "Cell ID Source" must be set to
"Manual".
Cell ID (Localiza- Indicates whether configuration data regarding the signaling of the OK, Not Query -
tion) transmitting cell was found in the data stream for the configured Used, Not
transmitter address. Found, Tx
● OK: Suitable data was found for these transmitters control Dis-
● Not Used: The function is deactivated abled, Wrong
● Not Found: There is no cell ID information present in the data Tx Address,
stream MIP Fail
● TX control Disabled: The function for automatically setting the
transmitter-specific parameters is switched off and must be
activated.
● Wrong Tx Address: There is no cell ID information present in
the data stream for these transmitters.
● MIP fail: The data stream does not contain any megaframe
information packets that can transmit the transmitter-specific
parameters.
TX Delay Offset Indicates the number of microseconds by which this transmitter is to ‒3276.8 µs to Read only -
(Localization) shift the time of transmission of its signal relative to other transmit- 3276.8 µs
ters in the DVB‑T network.
This value is set via the megaframe initialization packet (MIP).
"Modulation" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DVB‑T Coder > Modulation
Bandwidth (Man- Shows the set channel bandwidth occupied by the DVB‑T signal in 5 MHz, Maintenance Yes
ual TPS Settings) the frequency spectrum. 6 MHz,
7 MHz,
5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz or 8 MHz can be set. The selected frequency
8 MHz
depends on the required bandwidth of the channel to be transmitted.
FFT Length (Man- Shows the set FFT length. 2K, 4K, 8K Maintenance Yes
ual TPS Settings) It corresponds to the number of carriers used. The setting depends
on the customer‑specific decision as to which type of DVB network
is to be used.
With 2K, the OFDM signal is modeled on 1705 carriers; with 8K, it is
modeled on 6817 carriers. The setting "4K" can only be selected for
DVB‑H.
Coderate (Manual Shows the set code rate. 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, Maintenance Yes
TPS Settings) 5/6, 7/8
The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to <error
correction values + information data>. 1/2 provides the greatest error
correction and the lowest data transfer rate; 7/8 provides the lowest
error correction and the greatest data transfer rate.
Guard Interval Shows the set guard interval. 1/32, 1/16, Maintenance Yes
(Manual TPS Set- 1/8, 1/4
The guard interval determines the time span between signals for
tings) multicarrier modulation in which no information is transmitted.
The larger the time span is, the lower the risk of interference to other
transmitters and the lower the data transfer rate will be. The setting
values require a fraction of the symbol period.
Ideally, a value that is larger than the longest echo travel time of the
system should be selected.
Of all the possible setting values, 1/32 has the greatest risk of inter-
ference but also the highest data transfer rate.
Bandwidth (Active Shows the set channel bandwidth occupied by the DVB‑T signal in 5 MHz, Read only -
TPS Settings) the frequency spectrum. 6 MHz,
7 MHz,
8 MHz
FFT Length Shows the set FFT length (4K is only displayed for DVB‑H). 2K, 4K, 8K Read only -
(Active TPS Set-
tings)
Coderate (Active Shows the set code rate (ratio of information data to <error correc- 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, Read only -
TPS Settings) tion values + information data>). 5/6, 7/8
Guard Interval Shows the set guard interval. 1/32, 1/16, Read only -
(Active TPS Set- 1/8, 1/4
tings)
Active Cell ID Shows the active cell ID that this transmitter is to use. 0 to FFFF Read only -
(Active TPS Set- This value can be set manually (entry field "Configuration > Localiza-
tings) tion > Manual Cell ID") or automatically (by the SFN adapter).
TPS Settings Indicates whether the TPS settings are consistent. OK, Fail Read only -
(Active TPS Set-
tings)
"Test" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DVB‑T Coder > Test
Generate Test Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off, PRBS, Maintenance No
Signal ● Off Mute 1st P1
Switches off test signal generation. Symbol, Sin-
● PRBS gle Carrier
Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload.
● Mute 1st P1 Symbol
Suppresses the first symbol of each T2 frame. This function can
be used to measure the time of signal transmission.
● Single Carrier
Generates an unmodulated single carrier.
The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band
and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the
synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF
Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out
(X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this
test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
The selection can be changed here.
Testmode Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel center frequency
must be set during this process.
With DTV, the output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be
attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
TS feed
Every exciter which is suitable for the transmission of digital TV has two transport
stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). The data format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can be set
separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also dis-
played.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
IP feed
Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-
able in the exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned
an IP address in the Task View > Inputs > TX > Exciter > TS LAN menu. The two
Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams which contain additional configu-
ration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast and multicast streams. For multi-
cast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which makes the stream available in
the network must also be specified. It is possible to assign both logical IP streams to
the same physical socket, but to specify different multicast addresses. This provides
maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy scenarios in the feed path.
The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the Inputs/TS LAN task
and only become effective after the exciter has been rebooted.
The description of the parameters is given in ""IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
Sat feed
A satellite receiver module is available as an option for the exciter. It contains two inde-
pendent receivers. Each receiver has a common interface slot that allows the signal to
be decoded. The receivers can be used directly as logical inputs in the exciter. Alterna-
tively, an additional instrument with IP or ASI input can be looped in between the satel-
lite receivers and the signal inputs of the coder.
The decoded transport stream of one of the two satellite receivers can be output via
ASI connector X400. Optionally, both satellite receivers can be used independently of
each other as multicast servers via the Ethernet connector (X200). For this purpose,
one of the two multicast addresses of the satellite receiver modules must be set at the
additional instrument.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Sat Tuner" parameters" on page 121
DVB‑T/DVB‑T2 feed
A DVBT‑T/DVB‑T2 receiver module is optionally available for the exciter. Up to two
modules can be installed in an exciter. The receivers can be used directly as logical
inputs in the exciter. For the TLU9, it is possible to use a receiver module for monitor-
ing the output signal.
Software option K25 must be installed in order to use a receiver module as a monitor-
ing receiver. The option is available for the TLU9.
Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream, IP Stream, Sat and Receiver)
This menu is only available if a TS feed has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if an IP feed has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
(Status) via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Status)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Status)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate of the multiplex contained in the IP Read only -
(Status) stream.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
FEC Row (D) Shows the number of rows in the matrix used for calculating the for- Read only -
(Status) ward error correction.
FEC Col (L) (Sta- Shows the number of columns in the matrix used for calculating the Read only -
tus) forward error correction.
FEC Row valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
FEC Col valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
(Settings) stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal
switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol (Settings) Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Maintenance Yes
(Settings) ● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the Unicast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Port (Settings) Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
IP Address (Set- Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
tings) mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Maintenance Yes
(Settings) entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Transponder Fre- Shows the set frequency of the satellite transponder if Ku band or 10700 MHz to Maintenance Yes
quency (Configu- C band has been selected for LNB mode (parameter "Band"). 12750 MHz
ration) The setting can be changed here. If the parameter "Band" has been
set to "Manual", the intermediate frequency (IF) is shown in MHz.
Band (Configura- Indicates the band in which the LNB is operating. Ku, C, Manual Maintenance Yes
tion) The setting can be changed here. This parameter determines how
the selected intermediate frequency (IF) is calculated for the DVB‑S
or DVB‑S2 tuner.
● In Ku band mode, two LNB frequencies must be entered (high
and low). The tuner automatically selects the appropriate fre-
quency band and switches on the 22 kHz tone if the higher fre-
quency band is to be used.
● In C band mode, only one LNB frequency is used. The 22 kHz
tone can be activated manually.
● If the parameter "Manual" is set, the intermediate frequency (IF)
at which the tuner is to operate can be entered directly in the
"Transponder Frequency" field.
Polarization (LNB) Shows the set polarization of the LNB. Horizontal, Maintenance Yes
Vertical
The setting can be changed here. If the LNB supply voltage ("Volt-
age") is set to Off, this parameter has no effect.
Voltage (LNB) Shows the set supply voltage for the LNB. Off, 13 V and Maintenance Yes
18 V, 14 V
The setting can be changed here. The supply voltage for switching
and 19 V
over the polarization can be increased by approx. 1 V in order to
compensate for any voltage losses along the RF cable to the LNB.
LNB Freq Low Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 9300 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) lower frequency band (Ku band only). 10200 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at.
The lower standard frequency of most LNBs is 9750 MHz.
LNB Freq High Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 10200 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) upper frequency band (Ku band only). 11000 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at. Switchover to the upper fre-
quency band is triggered by activation of a 22 kHz tone.
The upper standard frequency of most LNBs is 10600 MHz.
LNB Freq (LNB) Shows the set frequency of the local oscillator for the LNB in MHz Maintenance Yes
(C band only).
The standard frequency of most LNBs is 5150 MHz.
22kHz Tone Used to switch between the two oscillators of the LNB (C band and Off, On Maintenance Yes
(LNB) Manual only).
Tuner Frequency Shows the intermediate frequency (IF) of the tuner in MHz. This is 950 MHz to Read only -
(Tuner) the current value including all frequency offsets. 2150 MHz
Receive Power Shows the current receive power in dBm. ‒10 dBm to ‒ Read only -
(Tuner) 70 dBm
Locked (Tuner) Indicates whether the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver has synchronized Read only -
with a signal.
Drift (Drift) Shows the difference between the set transponder frequency and Read only -
the frequency of the received signal (Tuner Frequency).
Warning Limit If the difference between the receive and transponder frequency is Maintenance Yes
(Drift) greater than this limit, a warning is generated.
Status (Drift) Shows a warning if the receive frequency deviates too greatly from OK, Too High Read only -
the transponder frequency.
"Demodulator" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > Demodulator
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Coderate (Coding) Shows the current FEC code rate of the receive signal. Read only -
Bit Error Rate Shows the current bit error rate. Read only -
(Coding)
Modulation (Cod- Shows the determined modulation mode of the receive signal. QPSK, 8PSK, Read only -
ing) Unknown
TS Datarate mea- Shows the measured data rate of the transport stream in bit/s. Read only -
sured (Status)
Symbolrate (Sig- Indicates whether the symbol rate is to be determined automatically Auto, Manual Maintenance Yes
nal) or set manually. The setting can be changed here.
TS Symbol Rate Shows the set symbol rate of the expected receive signal. 0 ksymbols/ Maintenance Yes
(Signal) sec to
The setting can be changed here if "Symbol Rate" is set to "Man-
50000 ksym-
ual". If "0" is entered, the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver performs a
bols/sec
"blind search" and attempts to determine all signal parameters auto-
matically.
Signal Type (Sig- Shows the signal type (or standard) setting for the expected receive DVB-S, DVB- Maintenance Yes
nal) signal. S2, Auto
The setting can be changed here.
Standard (Signal) Shows the determined TV standard of the receive signal. DVB-S, DVB- Read only -
S2
C/N (C/N) Shows the current carrier‑to‑noise ratio. OK, Too Low Read only -
A low carrier‑to‑noise ratio can cause bit errors during demodula-
tion.
Warning Limit If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a warning is dis- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(C/N) played.
Fault Limit (C/N) If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a fault is displayed. 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Status (C/N) Indicates whether the current signal‑to‑noise ratio is below or above Read only -
the set limit.
Link Margin (Link Shows the difference between the receiver sensitivity (i.e. the Read only -
Margin) receive power at which the receiver stops operating) and the current
receive power.
A link margin of 15 dB means that the system can tolerate an addi-
tional attenuation of 15 dB between the transmitter and receiver
before it stops operating.
Warning Limit If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a warning is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(Link Margin) gered. The threshold value can be changed here.
Fault Limit (Link If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a fault is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Margin) gered. This can cause the active input of the exciter to switch over.
The threshold value can be changed here.
Status (Link Mar- Indicates whether the signal attenuation is low enough to ensure OK, Too Low, Read only -
gin) smooth operation. The threshold values as of which a warning or Fail
fault is displayed can be changed.
PLS Code 1 to 3 Shows the decryption code valid for this data stream. The code and 0 to 262143 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- PL scrambling must be the same as the values set at the scrambler
bling) in the playout. Up to three different codes can be used. If "Loop" is
activated, these codes are automatically checked for validity. The
setting can be changed here. For PLS = Gold, the valid value range
is: 0 to 262143.
PLS Mode (Pay- Indicates the form in which the polynomial for decoding the data Root, Gold Maintenance Yes
load Scrambling) stream from the displayed code is to be calculated.
The setting can be changed here.
Physical layer scrambling is disabled if PL Scrambling is set to
"Gold" and Code is set to "0".
Loop (Payload Activates the automatic check to establish which of the max. three Disable, Maintenance Yes
Scrambling) PLS codes can be used to decode the data stream. Enable
PLS Selector Used to select which of the three set PLS codes is to be used. This 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- setting is available if automatic checking of the PLS codes is
bling) switched off ("Loop = Disable").
Status (Payload Indicates the PLS code used to decode the data stream. 1, 2, 3 Read only -
Scrambling)
"CAM" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > CAM
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
CAM inserted Indicates whether a CAM is installed (CAM = Conditional Access No, Yes Read only -
(Status) Module).
TS Input (Status) Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the input Off, On Read only -
of the conditional access module.
CAM Status (Sta- Shows the current status of the condition access module. Off, On, No Read only -
tus) ● Off: CAM has been deactivated. Module, No
● On: CAM is operating. Signal, No
● No Module: No CAM is installed. Key, Need
● No Signal: No transport stream has been detected at the input MMI
of the CAM.
● No Key: No valid decryption key is programmed for the CAM.
● Need MMI: A problem has occurred that can only be rectified
using an external module reader.
TS Output (Sta- Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the out- Off, On Read only -
tus) put of the conditional access module.
Manufacturer Shows the name of the conditional access module manufacturer. Read only -
Name (Status)
Module Name Shows the name of the conditional access module. Read only -
(Status)
Reset (Status) Indicates whether the conditional access module is to be automati- Manual, Auto- Maintenance Yes
cally reset in the event of malfunctions. The setting can be changed matically
here.
Reset CAM (Sta- In the event of malfunctions, the conditional access module can be Trigger Maintenance No
tus) reset manually by pressing a button.
Enable (Encryp- Used to define how the received content is to be encrypted. Off, CI, BISS Maintenance Yes
tion) ● Off: The content is received and transmitted unencrypted.
● CI: The content is decrypted by a conditional access module
(CAM) installed in the common interface (CI).
● BISS: The content is transmitted encrypted using a basic inter-
operable scrambling system (BISS).
BISS Mode Used to define how encryption is to be performed using the basic BISS E, BISS Maintenance Yes
(Encryption) interoperable scrambling system. BISS E uses the same encryption 1
algorithm as BISS 1, except that additional encryption of the session
word takes place. The session word is the key for decryption of the
transmitted data in the receiver.
● BISS 1: Encryption is performed using a session word (SW).
● BISS E: Encryption is performed using an encrypted session
word (ESW).
Injected ID (BISS) The receiver ID is the key of the receiver and is used to encrypt the Maintenance No
encrypted session word (ESW) in BISS E mode. The ESW can thus
be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured channel so that the
receiver can decrypt the receive signal again using its own receiver
ID.
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this key can
no longer be read after it has been entered.
Encrypted Ses- In BISS E mode, the encrypted session word is the key for decryp- Maintenance No
sion (BISS) tion of the transmitted data in the receiver. The encrypted session
word is encrypted using the key of the receiver (injected ID) and can
therefore be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured connec-
tion. The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this
key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
Clear Session In BISS 1 mode, the clear session word is the key for decryption of Maintenance No
(BISS) the transmitted data in the receiver. The clear session word itself is
unencrypted and should therefore be transmitted to the receiver via
a secure connection. The setting can be changed here. For security
reasons, this key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the coder OK, No Read only -
(Transport input by the SAT receiver module. If a fault is displayed, the settings Stream
Stream) of the SAT tuner should be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
T2-MI (MIP, SIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
(Transport contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
Stream) modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
TS ID Status (Mul- Indicates whether the data stream contains one or more transport Single Read only -
tistream) streams. With multistream reception, the number of the desired data Stream, Multi-
stream must be set under "Multistream Number". stream
Multistream Num- With multistream reception, the used TS is shown here. The setting Maintenance Yes
ber (Multistream) can be changed here.
TS ID Match Indicates whether the current TS ID matches the expected TS ID. If OK, Warning Read only -
(Transport Stream the transmitted TS ID changes, a warning is issued. If the expected
ID) TS ID is set to 0, the warning is suppressed.
Expected TS ID Indicates which TS ID is expected in the input signal. If the TS 0 to 16384 Maintenance Yes
(Transport Stream changes, a warning is issued. The warning can be suppressed if the
ID) "Expected TS ID" is set to 0.
Current TS ID Shows the ID of the currently used transport stream. With multi- Read only -
(Transport Stream stream operation, the multistream number defines the active TS.
ID)
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Service Name Shows the name of the service from the service description table Read only -
(SDT).
ID Shows the ID of the service from the program association table. 0 to 65535 Read only -
PMT PID Shows the ID of the service from the program map table.
Decrypt Indicates whether this service is decrypted by the CAM. Off, On Read only -
Scrambled Indicates whether the service is marked as encrypted in the service No, Yes Read only -
description table (SDT).
"BTS" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > BTS
This menu is only available for the TV standard "ISDB‑T" if a "Sat Input" has been
assigned to at least one logical input.
BTS Decompres- Indicates whether the packet length of the broadcast transport Off, On, Fault Read only -
sion (Status) stream (BTS) is changed from 188 bytes (DVB‑S/S2 standard) to
204 bytes (ISDB‑T standard). A valid option key (K60) must be
installed in order to use this function. A fault indicates a faulty trans-
port stream.
PLI Table PID Shows the packet ID which the PLI table in the DVB‑S/S2 stream 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
(PID Insertion) contains. The setting can be changed here.
Null Packet LA Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer A contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LB Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer B contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LC Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer C contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
RF Input Level Shows the current receive power in dBm. Read only -
(Signal Quality)
RF In (Signal Indicates whether a RF signal is detected at the input. Present, Not Read only -
Quality) Present
Demodulator (Sig- Indicates whether the demodulator is synchronized with the fre- Locked, Not Read only -
nal Quality) quency of the input signal. Locked
MER (MER) The modulation error ratio describes the signal quality. Read only -
A poor MER is caused by random shifting of the constellation points
in the constellation diagram. From a certain value, a receiver can no
longer cleanly distinguish the positions of the constellation points,
resulting in picture failure points.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the MER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(MER) the measured MER drops below the set threshold value, a warning
is issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
MER Status Indicates whether the measured MER is above or below the set Off, too low, Read only -
(MER) warning threshold. OK
BER (BER) The bit error rate is a measure for signal quality. Read only -
A high BER can be caused by e.g. a low signal‑to‑noise ratio.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the BER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(BER) the measured BER exceeds the set threshold value, a warning is
issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
BER Status (BER) Indicates whether the measured BER is above or below the set Off, Too High, Read only -
warning threshold. OK
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > Receiver > Transport
Stream
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
(Transport mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated Stream
Stream) here, the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
MIP (Transport Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
Stream) contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
PLP Number Shows the selected physical layer pipe. 0 -255 Maintenance
(PLP) The setting can be changed here.
Logical Input 1/2 Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independ- Variable Maintenance Yes
ently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is
possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The
selection options for the data sources are determined by the instal-
led input interfaces and option keys.
Multiplex 1/2 A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be Maintenance Yes
Name entered here.
ASI Out Indicates which of the two signals of the satellite receiver has been Off, Sat1, Maintenance No
switched to the ASI output (X25). The setting can be changed here. Sat2
This function is only available if a satellite receiver has been
selected for at least one logical input.
IP MUX 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP No Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
TS 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the TS feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the TS No Stream
Feed menu must be checked.
Receiver 1/2 Indicates whether a valid RF signal is being fed to the transmitter via Stream OK, Read only -
the receiver or monitor module. If a fault is indicated here, the set- No Stream
tings and displays in the Receiver and Monitor menu must be
checked.
Monitor Out For measuring purposes, any input signal can be switched to the Off, Active Maintenance No
TS Monitor Out socket (X22). The selection options for the data Input, Logical
sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option Input 1 or 2,
keys. TS Generator
Monitor Indicates which receiver module is used as the RF monitor. Off, Receiver Configuration No
1, Receiver 2
Only receiver modules which are not configured as "Logical Input"
can be selected. Changes to this settings only become effective
after the instrument has been rebooted.
This feature is available for the TLU9 if at least one receiver module
and option K25 are installed.
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input sig-
nal switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Port Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Uni- Maintenance Yes
● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the cast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
TS 1/2 Type Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21. Auto, ASI, Maintenance No
● Auto: The data format is detected automatically. SMPTE
● ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream.
● SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the IP feed. Read only -
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP/IIP/TCP+DB Depending on the selected TV standard, this indicates whether addi- Read only -
tional information for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN) is
present in the data stream.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the physical network interface of the IP Configuration No
feed. The IP address can be changed here. An IP address must also
be entered for multicast mode. Changes only become effective after
the exciter is restarted by pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
Network Mask Shows the network mask. The setting can be changed here. Configuration No
Changes only become effective after the exciter is restarted by
pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
MAC Address Shows the worldwide unique MAC address of the network interface. Read only -
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input and the IP output of the satellite receiver has been activated with option key K51.
Local IP Address Shows the logical network address of Ethernet connector X200 on Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) the satellite receiver board.
The decoded transport streams of both satellite receivers are output
via this connector.
The setting can be changed here.
Network Mask The network mask splits the IP address range into a network part Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) and an instrument part. The network masks of all computers in an
IP network should be configured the same.
MAC Address Shows the hardware address of the network adapter. It serves as a Read only -
(Monitor Out) unique ID for the instrument in a computer network.
Multicast Address The satellite receiver forwards the decrypted transport stream via IP Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) to external instruments that have subscribed to the displayed
address. The multicast address can be set separately for both satel-
lite receivers. Both data streams are output via Ethernet connector
X200.
Port (Monitor Out) Shows the UDP port to which the data stream is to be sent. 1025 to Maintenance No
65535
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Row (Monitor Shows the number of rows that are to be used for calculation of the 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Col (Monitor Shows the number of columns that are to be used for calculation of 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) the ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching
The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits
seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the
"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes
place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available
without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in
MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal
feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which
arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the
two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals
can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
Automatic (Con- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
figuration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Automatic (Con- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Read only -
figuration) ● Off: Changed
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● Active:
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only dis-
played if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, None
If "None" is set, both inputs have equal priority. This minimizes the
number of switching operations.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always
takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If "Seamless Switching" has been
set to "On" and is possible, switchover always takes place immedi-
ately without interruption regardless of the set guard time.
If "to Reserve Only" has been selected as the "Direction", the set
guard time has no effect.
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Not Possible, Read only -
Switching) Possible
"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different
data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set
"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals
with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes
place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard
Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Seamless (Seam- Activates seamless switching. If seamless switching is activated, Off/On Maintenance Yes
less Switching) "Guard Time Back" is changed to a minimum of 15 seconds.
Delay between Shows the delay time between logical input 1 and logical input 2 in 0 ms to Read only -
Inputs (Seamless ms. A positive value means that the signal at input 2 arrives later at 1000 ms
Switching) the exciter.
If Reserve Fails Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
(Reserve Control) monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Input (Selector) Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is ON, the preselected input is switched over.
"Settings" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Automatic> Settings
Mute on Input Fail Used to determine whether the output signal of the exciter is to be No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) switched off if the input signal of all available inputs fails, or whether
"null packets" are to be sent. This switch is available in multiple‑fre-
quency networks (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN),
the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal is fed.
Input Fail Detec- Indicates the speed of response to missing data packets. Normal: Normal, Fast Maintenance Yes
tion (Input Con- Bursts in the transport stream are processed without fault message
trol) (recommended setting for IP feed). Fast: This setting reduces the
response time to missing data packets. It can be selected if it is
ensured that there is a continuous data stream at the input of the
exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Detect Lost Pack- Indicates whether the monitoring of missing data packets is active. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
ets (Input Control) ● No
Single missing data packets are tolerated. Longer interruptions
of the data stream will, however, cause the input to switch over
or result in an "Input Fail".
● Yes
If the automatic input signal switchover function is ON, the
standby input becomes active as soon as a data packet is lost.
If the automatic input signal switchover function is OFF, a miss-
ing data packet will result in an "Input Fail".
The setting can be changed here.
Transparent TS Indicates whether the transport stream is routed transparently No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) through the coder or whether it can be modified during signal pro-
cessing.
● Off
Stuffing and PCR correction are active.
● On
Stuffing and PCR correction are OFF. The fed data rate must
match the required data rate.
This parameter is only available for the TV standard "DVB‑T" in
"MFN" mode and can be changed here.
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter No (Create Maintenance Yes
Changeover (On is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for Warning), Yes
Input Fail) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). (Create Fault)
● Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the
higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to
switch over to another exciter or transmitter.
● No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Fail Delay Used to set the length of the checkout time which must expire after 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(On Input Fail) detection of an input signal fault before the exciter displays a fault. If
a short checkout time is set, the system can quickly switch over to a
standby exciter if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long check-
out time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a fault to
switch to an alternative feed path so that the exciter is prevented
from switching over to a redundancy component.
For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the exciter has a function that allows
the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the SFN, time synchroni-
zation of all exciters in the network is performed using a pulse per second (PPS),
which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.
Settings
Source The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of transmis- External PPS, Maintenance Yes
sion can be selected in this list. Internal GPS
Ext. PPS Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
socket (X23) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
pulse per second (PPS). This function must have been enabled Inaccurate,
beforehand by installing an option key. OK
SFN Sync Used to activate time synchronization. On (SFN), Off Maintenance Yes
● Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not controlled. (MFN)
● On (SFN): The time of transmission of a symbol is the same for
all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network (SFN).
PPS State Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized OK, Holdover, Read only -
with the frequency control. Holdover
● OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency con- expired, Miss-
trol. ing
● Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of the fre-
quency control have failed. Time synchronization is now per-
formed with the accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator
(OCXO).
● Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which the transmitter
is permitted to remain in holdover mode has expired (see the
Frequency Control menu).
● Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since the exciter
was last started.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control
must be checked.
Max. Deviation Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the time of 0μs to 100 μs Read only -
transmission relative to the internally controlled reference fre-
quency. If the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmis-
sion is recalculated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute).
SFN State Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a SFN Resync, Read only -
time‑synchronous manner. If the "No Time Reference" error mes- No Time Infor-
sage is displayed, the reference feed of the time synchronization mation, No
and the frequency control must be checked. If the "No Time Infor- Time Refer-
mation" fault message is displayed, it must be checked whether the ence, SFN
control information for the time of transmission is contained in the Resync, In
data stream. (See the "Input" menu.) Time
Maximum Delay Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its regular transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay is
set at the SFN adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the
dynamic SFN.
Network Delay Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center to the 0 s to 1 s Read only -
input of the signal processing unit. This delay depends on the used
transmission path. If an IP feed is used, the FEC processing time is
a component of the network delay.
Processing Time Shows the internal transit time for signal processing in the exciter. It 0 s to 1 s Read only -
depends on the set modulation parameters.
Dynamic Delay Indicates the signal delay controlled by the SFN (single‑frequency 0 s to 1 s Read only -
network) synchronization which is required in order to meet the
desired time of transmission exactly. The displayed value contains
the set static delay offset as well as the TX time offset (if available).
Total Delay Shows the total transit time of the signal through the transmitter. It is 0 s to 1 s Read only -
the sum of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
Static Delay Off- Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter 0 s to 1 s Maintenance Yes
set site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of trans-
mission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to
compensate for differences between transmission systems from dif-
ferent manufacturers.
TX Offset Delay Positive or negative offset (transferred in the MIP for the individual 0 s to 1 s Read only -
transmitter location) of the time of transmission relative to the regular
time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. The TX auto-
matic switchover has to be enabled for display and activation. If TX
Offset Delay and Static Delay are active at the same time, their
effects are added together.
Dispatch Time Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its actual transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay corre-
sponds to Maximum Delay (compulsory for all transmitters in an
SFN) plus Static Delay Offset plus TX Time Offset (if available).
4.5.3 ISDB-T
The ISDB‑T TV standard can be used both in single-frequency networks (SFN) and in
multiple-frequency networks (MFN). In an SFN, the time at which an ISDB‑T symbol is
transmitted is either set automatically via the IIP (ISDBT Information Packet) or set
statically at each individual transmitter. The network mode is selected in the SFN
menu.
If an IIP is present in the feed data stream, all TMCC (transmission and multiplexing
configuration control) settings should be performed automatically. In this case, "Coder
Source" must be set to "IIP".
In the case of operation in a static SFN (in which usually no IIP is present), all coder
settings can also be performed manually. In this case, "Coder Source" must be set to
"Manual". Depending on this switch, the settings in the "Modulation (Manual)" tab are
either effective or not effective. The active (effective) TMCC setting of the coder is dis-
played in the "Modulation (Active)" tab. With manual setting, the display is identical to
the TMCC values set in the "Modulation (Manual)" tab. With automatic setting via IP,
the displayed TMCC settings are identical to the values signaled via IP.
In the Localization menu, certain exciter settings can be controlled automatically via
MIP. The following functions are supported:
● Transmitter‑specific setting of the time of transmission
"Configuration" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ISDB-T Coder > Configuration
Coder Source Shows the selected source for the settings of the TMCC (transmis- Manual, IIP Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) sion and multiplexing configuration control) for the ISDB‑T coder.
The following settings can be selected:
● Manual, i.e. parameters are set in the transmitter
● IIP (ISDB‑T information packets), i.e. parameters are read out
of the IIP in the transmission
TMCC Next (Con- Indicates from where the TMCC‑NEXT (Transmission and Multiplex- Off, Active, Maintenance Yes
figuration) ing Configuration Control NEXT) parameters are to be retrieved. Automatic
The following settings can be selected:
● If "Active" is set, the settings for TMCC‑NEXT from the currently
actively set values for TMCC are used.
● With "Automatic", the TMCC‑NEXT parameters from the ISDB‑T
information packet (IIP) are applied, if possible. Otherwise, the
currently set values are used.
● With "Off", TMCC NEXT is not used.
IIP PID (Localiza- Shows the packet ID number (PID) that has been set for the ISDB‑T 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
tion) information packet (IIP) in the input data stream.
The setting can be changed here.
Requirement: Coder Source must be set to IIP.
IIP Packet (Locali- Indicates whether or not ISDB‑T information packets with the set IIP ----, Not Read only -
zation) ID are present in the transport stream and whether the ISDB-T gate- Found, No
way inserts SFN information into the IIP. SFN Info,
Found
Only displayed if "IIP" has been selected as Coder Source.
Equipment Con- Activates or deactivates the instrument ID. On, Off Maintenance Yes
trol (Localization) Transmitter‑specific settings can be configured via the ISDB‑T infor-
mation packet present in the transport stream.
Equipment ID A unique instrument ID used for referencing to special settings of the 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
(Localization) ISDB‑T information packet (IIP).
Equipment ID Sta- Indicates whether or not SFN information for the set Equipment ID is Not Found, Read only -
tus (Localization) contained in the transport stream. Only displayed if Equipment Con- Found
trol has been switched on and IIP has been selected as Coder
Source.
IIP Time Offset Shows the time‑of‑transmission offset signaled for this transmitter Read only -
(Localization) via the ISDB‑T information packet (IIP).
IIP SFN Mode Shows the selected network mode. ● Off Maintenance Yes
(Localization) (MFN)
The following modes can be selected:
● Dynamic
● Off (multiple-frequency networks)
(SFN)
● Dynamic SFN (single-frequency network): The time of transmis-
● Static
sion of all transmitters in the network is predetermined centrally
(SFN)
via an SFN adapter.
● Auto (via
● Static SFN: The time of transmission is preset individually at
IIP)
each transmitter.
● Auto (via IIP): The SFN mode and time of transmission are
automatically predetermined centrally via an SFN adapter.
Frame Counter Indicates whether the number of incoming transport stream packets OK, Warning Read only -
(Localization) (TSP) per multiplex frame corresponds to the settings or the informa-
tion read out from the ISDB‑T information packet (IIP).
A warning occurs if individual TSPs in the signal feed have been
changed or are lost. In this case, the exciter will mute briefly.
Bandwidth (Com- Shows the channel bandwidth occupied by the ISDB‑T signal in the 6 MHz, Configuration Yes
mon IIP Settings) frequency spectrum. 8 MHz
6 MHz or 8 MHz can be set. The selected frequency depends on the
required bandwidth of the channel to be transmitted.
Partial Reception Indicates whether "Partial Reception" is switched on. Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Common IIP Set- If layer A for mobile reception is to be used (1‑segment receiver),
tings) "Partial Reception" must be set to "On". In this case, segment 0 is
positioned in the band center.
The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT
(transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC
NEXT is set to "Manual".
FFT Length Shows the set FFT length. 2K (Mode 1), Maintenance Yes
(Common IIP Set- 4K (Mode 2),
The following values can be set here:
tings) ● Mode 1 (2K): 2048 carriers 8K (Mode 3)
● Mode 2 (4K): 4096 carriers
● Mode 3 (8K): 8192 carriers
Guard Interval Shows the set guard interval. 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, Maintenance Yes
(Common IIP Set- 1/32
The guard interval determines the time span between signals for
tings) multicarrier modulation in which no information is transmitted. The
larger the time span is, the lower the risk of interference and the
lower the data transfer rate.
The setting values are a fraction of the symbol period. Ideally, a
value that is larger than the channel spread should be selected.
The danger from interference is highest at 1/32, but the data transfer
rate is also highest.
The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT
(transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC
NEXT is set to "Manual".
Segments (Layer Shows the number of segments used for the respective layer. 0 to 13 Maintenance Yes
A, B, C) The distribution of segments between the layers is subject to various
conditions:
● 0: A layer is deactivated.
For layer A, 0 is not permitted.
For layer B, 0 is possible only if layer C also has 0 segments.
● The sum of segments from all active layers must always be 13.
● The segments can be distributed between 1, 2 or 3 layers.
● The assignment of 1 single segment is only possible for layer A.
Partial reception must be activated in this case (Partial Recep-
tion = On). The remaining 12 segments can be distributed
between the layers B and C in accordance with the above‑men-
tioned rules.
Coderate (Layer Shows the set code rate. 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, Maintenance Yes
A, B, C) 5/6, 7/8
The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to <error
correction values + information data>. 1/2 provides the greatest
error correction; 7/8 provides the greatest data transfer rate.
The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT
(transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC
NEXT is set to "Manual".
Interleaver (Layer Shows the selected conversion length of the time interleaver. 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, Maintenance Yes
A, B, C) 16, 32
To reduce the susceptibility to faults when there is noise, the time
interleaver converts the information data in a data block.
0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 can be selected as conversion length. 0
means that no conversion takes place and 32 corresponds to the
highest degree of conversion. This provides the greatest protection,
but also the greatest latency.
The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT
(transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC
NEXT is set to "Manual".
Configuration Indicates whether the set ISDB‑T configuration is consistent and Valid, Invalid Read only -
(Status) valid over all three layers.
If a fault is indicated, it must be checked whether the sum of all seg-
ments over the three layers is exactly 13.
Bandwidth (Com- Shows the set channel bandwidth occupied by the ISDB‑T signal in 6 MHz, Read only -
mon IIP Settings) the frequency spectrum. 8 MHz
Partial Reception Indicates whether Partial Reception is switched on or off. Off, On Read only -
(Common IIP Set-
tings)
FFT Length (Com- Shows the set FFT length. 2K (Mode 1), Read only -
mon IIP Settings) 4K (Mode 2),
8K (Mode 3)
Guard Interval Shows the set guard interval. 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, Read only -
(Common IIP Set- 1/32
tings)
Segments (Layer Shows the number of segments set for the respective layer. 0 to 13 Read only -
A, B, C)
Coderate (Layer Shows the set code rate. 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, Read only -
A, B, C) 5/6, 7/8
Interleaver (Layer Shows the selected conversion length of the time interleaver. 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, Read only -
A, B, C) 16, 32
Configuration Indicates whether the set ISDB‑T configuration is consistent and Valid, Invalid Read only -
(Status) valid over all three layers.
If a fault is indicated, it must be checked whether the sum of all seg-
ments over the three layers is exactly 13.
EWBS Activation Shows the currently transmitted EWBS activation flag (EWBS = Not Available Read only -
Flag (Status) Emergency Warning Broadcast System). (Off), Off, On
● Not Available (Off):
"Switch On" could not be detected in the IIP (ISDB‑T Informa-
tion Packet) or no signal is being fed to the instrument. EWBS
is "off".
● Off:
"Switch On" = Off is signaled in the IIP.
● On:
"Switch On" = On is signaled in the IIP.
Network ID Indicates whether the ID of the feed system in the network informa- BTS, Manual Maintenance Yes
(Source) tion table is to be retrieved automatically from the transport stream
or whether it is to be replaced manually by a different value.
The setting can be changed here.
Transport Stream Indicates whether the ID used to distinguish the various multiplexes BTS, Manual Maintenance Yes
ID (Source) within a feed system in the network information table is to be
retrieved automatically from the transport stream or whether it is to
be replaced manually by a different value.
The setting can be changed here.
Area Code Indicates whether the ID in the network information table to allow BTS, Manual Maintenance Yes
(Source) assignment to content-specific areas of a country is to be retrieved
automatically from the transport stream or whether it is to be
replaced manually by a different value.
The setting can be changed here.
Frequency Indicates whether the transmit frequency in the network information BTS, Manual Maintenance Yes
(Source) table is to be retrieved automatically from the transport stream or
whether it is to be replaced manually by a different value.
The setting can be changed here.
Virtual Channel Indicates whether the recommended remote control code number BTS, Manual Maintenance Yes
(Source) which is to be allocated to the usable transport stream, is to be
retrieved automatically from the transport stream or whether it is to
be replaced manually by a different value.
The setting can be changed here.
Network ID (Man- The unique feed system ID transmitted in the network information 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
ual Settings) table is overwritten with the displayed value if "Manual" has been
selected as Source.
The setting can be changed here.
Transport Stream The unique ID transmitted in the network information table and 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
ID (Manual Set- used to distinguish the various multiplexes within a feed system is
tings) overwritten with the displayed value if "Manual" has been selected
as Source.
The setting can be changed here.
Area Code (Man- The ID transmitted in the network information table for assignment 0 to 4095 Maintenance Yes
ual Settings) to content-specific areas of a country is overwritten with the dis-
played value if "Manual" has been selected as Source.
The setting can be changed here.
Frequency (Man- The transmit frequency transmitted in the network information table Maintenance Yes
ual Settings) is overwritten with the displayed value if "Manual" has been
selected as Source.
The setting can be changed here.
Virtual Channel The remote control code number which is transmitted in the net- 0 to 255 Maintenance Yes
(Manual Settings) work information table and to be allocated to the transport stream is
overwritten with the displayed value if "Manual" has been selected
as Source.
The setting can be changed here.
"Test" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ISDB-T Coder > Test
Generate Test Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off, Test- Maintenance No
Signal ● Off mode 0,
Switches off test signal generation. Testmode 1,
● Testmode 0 Single Car-
Activates a test sequence with three layers, ISDB‑T mode 1 rier
and guard interval 1/4 – Layer A: 1 segment, DQPSK, code
rate 1/2, time interleaver: 0 – Layer B: 7 segments, 16QAM,
code rate 7/8, time interleaver: 0 – Layer C: 5 segments,
64QAM, code rate 2/3, time interleaver: 0.
● Testmode 1
Activates a test sequence with one layer, ISDB-T mode 1 and
guard interval 1/4: – Layer A: 13 segments, QPSK, code rate
1/2, time interleaver: 0.
● Single Carrier
Generates an unmodulated single carrier at the band center.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the
synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF
Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out
(X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this
test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
Testmode Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel center frequency
must be set during this process.
With DTV, the output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be
attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
TS feed
Every exciter which is suitable for the transmission of digital TV has two transport
stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). The data format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can be set
separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also dis-
played.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
IP feed
Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-
able in the exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned
an IP address in the Task View > Inputs > TX > Exciter > TS LAN menu. The two
Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams which contain additional configu-
ration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast and multicast streams. For multi-
cast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which makes the stream available in
the network must also be specified. It is possible to assign both logical IP streams to
the same physical socket, but to specify different multicast addresses. This provides
maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy scenarios in the feed path.
The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the Inputs/TS LAN task
and only become effective after the exciter has been rebooted.
The description of the parameters is given in ""IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
Sat feed
A satellite receiver module is available as an option for the exciter. It contains two inde-
pendent receivers. Each receiver has a common interface slot that allows the signal to
be decoded. The receivers can be used directly as logical inputs in the exciter. Alterna-
tively, an additional instrument with IP or ASI input can be looped in between the satel-
lite receivers and the signal inputs of the coder.
The decoded transport stream of one of the two satellite receivers can be output via
ASI connector X400. Optionally, both satellite receivers can be used independently of
each other as multicast servers via the Ethernet connector (X200). For this purpose,
one of the two multicast addresses of the satellite receiver modules must be set at the
additional instrument.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Sat Tuner" parameters" on page 121
DVB‑T/DVB‑T2 feed
A DVBT‑T/DVB‑T2 receiver module is optionally available for the exciter. Up to two
modules can be installed in an exciter. The receivers can be used directly as logical
inputs in the exciter. For the TLU9, it is possible to use a receiver module for monitor-
ing the output signal.
Software option K25 must be installed in order to use a receiver module as a monitor-
ing receiver. The option is available for the TLU9.
Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream, IP Stream, Sat and Receiver)
This menu is only available if a TS feed has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if an IP feed has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
(Status) via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Status)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Status)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate of the multiplex contained in the IP Read only -
(Status) stream.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
FEC Row (D) Shows the number of rows in the matrix used for calculating the for- Read only -
(Status) ward error correction.
FEC Col (L) (Sta- Shows the number of columns in the matrix used for calculating the Read only -
tus) forward error correction.
FEC Row valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
FEC Col valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
(Settings) stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal
switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol (Settings) Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Maintenance Yes
(Settings) ● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the Unicast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Port (Settings) Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
IP Address (Set- Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
tings) mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Maintenance Yes
(Settings) entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Transponder Fre- Shows the set frequency of the satellite transponder if Ku band or 10700 MHz to Maintenance Yes
quency (Configu- C band has been selected for LNB mode (parameter "Band"). 12750 MHz
ration) The setting can be changed here. If the parameter "Band" has been
set to "Manual", the intermediate frequency (IF) is shown in MHz.
Band (Configura- Indicates the band in which the LNB is operating. Ku, C, Manual Maintenance Yes
tion) The setting can be changed here. This parameter determines how
the selected intermediate frequency (IF) is calculated for the DVB‑S
or DVB‑S2 tuner.
● In Ku band mode, two LNB frequencies must be entered (high
and low). The tuner automatically selects the appropriate fre-
quency band and switches on the 22 kHz tone if the higher fre-
quency band is to be used.
● In C band mode, only one LNB frequency is used. The 22 kHz
tone can be activated manually.
● If the parameter "Manual" is set, the intermediate frequency (IF)
at which the tuner is to operate can be entered directly in the
"Transponder Frequency" field.
Polarization (LNB) Shows the set polarization of the LNB. Horizontal, Maintenance Yes
Vertical
The setting can be changed here. If the LNB supply voltage ("Volt-
age") is set to Off, this parameter has no effect.
Voltage (LNB) Shows the set supply voltage for the LNB. Off, 13 V and Maintenance Yes
18 V, 14 V
The setting can be changed here. The supply voltage for switching
and 19 V
over the polarization can be increased by approx. 1 V in order to
compensate for any voltage losses along the RF cable to the LNB.
LNB Freq Low Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 9300 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) lower frequency band (Ku band only). 10200 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at.
The lower standard frequency of most LNBs is 9750 MHz.
LNB Freq High Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 10200 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) upper frequency band (Ku band only). 11000 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at. Switchover to the upper fre-
quency band is triggered by activation of a 22 kHz tone.
The upper standard frequency of most LNBs is 10600 MHz.
LNB Freq (LNB) Shows the set frequency of the local oscillator for the LNB in MHz Maintenance Yes
(C band only).
The standard frequency of most LNBs is 5150 MHz.
22kHz Tone Used to switch between the two oscillators of the LNB (C band and Off, On Maintenance Yes
(LNB) Manual only).
Tuner Frequency Shows the intermediate frequency (IF) of the tuner in MHz. This is 950 MHz to Read only -
(Tuner) the current value including all frequency offsets. 2150 MHz
Receive Power Shows the current receive power in dBm. ‒10 dBm to ‒ Read only -
(Tuner) 70 dBm
Locked (Tuner) Indicates whether the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver has synchronized Read only -
with a signal.
Drift (Drift) Shows the difference between the set transponder frequency and Read only -
the frequency of the received signal (Tuner Frequency).
Warning Limit If the difference between the receive and transponder frequency is Maintenance Yes
(Drift) greater than this limit, a warning is generated.
Status (Drift) Shows a warning if the receive frequency deviates too greatly from OK, Too High Read only -
the transponder frequency.
"Demodulator" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > Demodulator
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Coderate (Coding) Shows the current FEC code rate of the receive signal. Read only -
Bit Error Rate Shows the current bit error rate. Read only -
(Coding)
Modulation (Cod- Shows the determined modulation mode of the receive signal. QPSK, 8PSK, Read only -
ing) Unknown
TS Datarate mea- Shows the measured data rate of the transport stream in bit/s. Read only -
sured (Status)
Symbolrate (Sig- Indicates whether the symbol rate is to be determined automatically Auto, Manual Maintenance Yes
nal) or set manually. The setting can be changed here.
TS Symbol Rate Shows the set symbol rate of the expected receive signal. 0 ksymbols/ Maintenance Yes
(Signal) sec to
The setting can be changed here if "Symbol Rate" is set to "Man-
50000 ksym-
ual". If "0" is entered, the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver performs a
bols/sec
"blind search" and attempts to determine all signal parameters auto-
matically.
Signal Type (Sig- Shows the signal type (or standard) setting for the expected receive DVB-S, DVB- Maintenance Yes
nal) signal. S2, Auto
The setting can be changed here.
Standard (Signal) Shows the determined TV standard of the receive signal. DVB-S, DVB- Read only -
S2
C/N (C/N) Shows the current carrier‑to‑noise ratio. OK, Too Low Read only -
A low carrier‑to‑noise ratio can cause bit errors during demodula-
tion.
Warning Limit If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a warning is dis- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(C/N) played.
Fault Limit (C/N) If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a fault is displayed. 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Status (C/N) Indicates whether the current signal‑to‑noise ratio is below or above Read only -
the set limit.
Link Margin (Link Shows the difference between the receiver sensitivity (i.e. the Read only -
Margin) receive power at which the receiver stops operating) and the current
receive power.
A link margin of 15 dB means that the system can tolerate an addi-
tional attenuation of 15 dB between the transmitter and receiver
before it stops operating.
Warning Limit If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a warning is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(Link Margin) gered. The threshold value can be changed here.
Fault Limit (Link If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a fault is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Margin) gered. This can cause the active input of the exciter to switch over.
The threshold value can be changed here.
Status (Link Mar- Indicates whether the signal attenuation is low enough to ensure OK, Too Low, Read only -
gin) smooth operation. The threshold values as of which a warning or Fail
fault is displayed can be changed.
PLS Code 1 to 3 Shows the decryption code valid for this data stream. The code and 0 to 262143 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- PL scrambling must be the same as the values set at the scrambler
bling) in the playout. Up to three different codes can be used. If "Loop" is
activated, these codes are automatically checked for validity. The
setting can be changed here. For PLS = Gold, the valid value range
is: 0 to 262143.
PLS Mode (Pay- Indicates the form in which the polynomial for decoding the data Root, Gold Maintenance Yes
load Scrambling) stream from the displayed code is to be calculated.
The setting can be changed here.
Physical layer scrambling is disabled if PL Scrambling is set to
"Gold" and Code is set to "0".
Loop (Payload Activates the automatic check to establish which of the max. three Disable, Maintenance Yes
Scrambling) PLS codes can be used to decode the data stream. Enable
PLS Selector Used to select which of the three set PLS codes is to be used. This 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- setting is available if automatic checking of the PLS codes is
bling) switched off ("Loop = Disable").
Status (Payload Indicates the PLS code used to decode the data stream. 1, 2, 3 Read only -
Scrambling)
"CAM" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > CAM
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
CAM inserted Indicates whether a CAM is installed (CAM = Conditional Access No, Yes Read only -
(Status) Module).
TS Input (Status) Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the input Off, On Read only -
of the conditional access module.
CAM Status (Sta- Shows the current status of the condition access module. Off, On, No Read only -
tus) ● Off: CAM has been deactivated. Module, No
● On: CAM is operating. Signal, No
● No Module: No CAM is installed. Key, Need
● No Signal: No transport stream has been detected at the input MMI
of the CAM.
● No Key: No valid decryption key is programmed for the CAM.
● Need MMI: A problem has occurred that can only be rectified
using an external module reader.
TS Output (Sta- Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the out- Off, On Read only -
tus) put of the conditional access module.
Manufacturer Shows the name of the conditional access module manufacturer. Read only -
Name (Status)
Module Name Shows the name of the conditional access module. Read only -
(Status)
Reset (Status) Indicates whether the conditional access module is to be automati- Manual, Auto- Maintenance Yes
cally reset in the event of malfunctions. The setting can be changed matically
here.
Reset CAM (Sta- In the event of malfunctions, the conditional access module can be Trigger Maintenance No
tus) reset manually by pressing a button.
Enable (Encryp- Used to define how the received content is to be encrypted. Off, CI, BISS Maintenance Yes
tion) ● Off: The content is received and transmitted unencrypted.
● CI: The content is decrypted by a conditional access module
(CAM) installed in the common interface (CI).
● BISS: The content is transmitted encrypted using a basic inter-
operable scrambling system (BISS).
BISS Mode Used to define how encryption is to be performed using the basic BISS E, BISS Maintenance Yes
(Encryption) interoperable scrambling system. BISS E uses the same encryption 1
algorithm as BISS 1, except that additional encryption of the session
word takes place. The session word is the key for decryption of the
transmitted data in the receiver.
● BISS 1: Encryption is performed using a session word (SW).
● BISS E: Encryption is performed using an encrypted session
word (ESW).
Injected ID (BISS) The receiver ID is the key of the receiver and is used to encrypt the Maintenance No
encrypted session word (ESW) in BISS E mode. The ESW can thus
be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured channel so that the
receiver can decrypt the receive signal again using its own receiver
ID.
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this key can
no longer be read after it has been entered.
Encrypted Ses- In BISS E mode, the encrypted session word is the key for decryp- Maintenance No
sion (BISS) tion of the transmitted data in the receiver. The encrypted session
word is encrypted using the key of the receiver (injected ID) and can
therefore be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured connec-
tion. The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this
key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
Clear Session In BISS 1 mode, the clear session word is the key for decryption of Maintenance No
(BISS) the transmitted data in the receiver. The clear session word itself is
unencrypted and should therefore be transmitted to the receiver via
a secure connection. The setting can be changed here. For security
reasons, this key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the coder OK, No Read only -
(Transport input by the SAT receiver module. If a fault is displayed, the settings Stream
Stream) of the SAT tuner should be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
T2-MI (MIP, SIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
(Transport contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
Stream) modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
TS ID Status (Mul- Indicates whether the data stream contains one or more transport Single Read only -
tistream) streams. With multistream reception, the number of the desired data Stream, Multi-
stream must be set under "Multistream Number". stream
Multistream Num- With multistream reception, the used TS is shown here. The setting Maintenance Yes
ber (Multistream) can be changed here.
TS ID Match Indicates whether the current TS ID matches the expected TS ID. If OK, Warning Read only -
(Transport Stream the transmitted TS ID changes, a warning is issued. If the expected
ID) TS ID is set to 0, the warning is suppressed.
Expected TS ID Indicates which TS ID is expected in the input signal. If the TS 0 to 16384 Maintenance Yes
(Transport Stream changes, a warning is issued. The warning can be suppressed if the
ID) "Expected TS ID" is set to 0.
Current TS ID Shows the ID of the currently used transport stream. With multi- Read only -
(Transport Stream stream operation, the multistream number defines the active TS.
ID)
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Service Name Shows the name of the service from the service description table Read only -
(SDT).
ID Shows the ID of the service from the program association table. 0 to 65535 Read only -
PMT PID Shows the ID of the service from the program map table.
Decrypt Indicates whether this service is decrypted by the CAM. Off, On Read only -
Scrambled Indicates whether the service is marked as encrypted in the service No, Yes Read only -
description table (SDT).
"BTS" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > BTS
This menu is only available for the TV standard "ISDB‑T" if a "Sat Input" has been
assigned to at least one logical input.
BTS Decompres- Indicates whether the packet length of the broadcast transport Off, On, Fault Read only -
sion (Status) stream (BTS) is changed from 188 bytes (DVB‑S/S2 standard) to
204 bytes (ISDB‑T standard). A valid option key (K60) must be
installed in order to use this function. A fault indicates a faulty trans-
port stream.
PLI Table PID Shows the packet ID which the PLI table in the DVB‑S/S2 stream 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
(PID Insertion) contains. The setting can be changed here.
Null Packet LA Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer A contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LB Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer B contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LC Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer C contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
RF Input Level Shows the current receive power in dBm. Read only -
(Signal Quality)
RF In (Signal Indicates whether a RF signal is detected at the input. Present, Not Read only -
Quality) Present
Demodulator (Sig- Indicates whether the demodulator is synchronized with the fre- Locked, Not Read only -
nal Quality) quency of the input signal. Locked
MER (MER) The modulation error ratio describes the signal quality. Read only -
A poor MER is caused by random shifting of the constellation points
in the constellation diagram. From a certain value, a receiver can no
longer cleanly distinguish the positions of the constellation points,
resulting in picture failure points.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the MER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(MER) the measured MER drops below the set threshold value, a warning
is issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
MER Status Indicates whether the measured MER is above or below the set Off, too low, Read only -
(MER) warning threshold. OK
BER (BER) The bit error rate is a measure for signal quality. Read only -
A high BER can be caused by e.g. a low signal‑to‑noise ratio.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the BER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(BER) the measured BER exceeds the set threshold value, a warning is
issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
BER Status (BER) Indicates whether the measured BER is above or below the set Off, Too High, Read only -
warning threshold. OK
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > Receiver > Transport
Stream
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
(Transport mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated Stream
Stream) here, the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
MIP (Transport Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
Stream) contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
PLP Number Shows the selected physical layer pipe. 0 -255 Maintenance
(PLP) The setting can be changed here.
Logical Input 1/2 Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independ- Variable Maintenance Yes
ently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is
possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The
selection options for the data sources are determined by the instal-
led input interfaces and option keys.
Multiplex 1/2 A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be Maintenance Yes
Name entered here.
ASI Out Indicates which of the two signals of the satellite receiver has been Off, Sat1, Maintenance No
switched to the ASI output (X25). The setting can be changed here. Sat2
This function is only available if a satellite receiver has been
selected for at least one logical input.
IP MUX 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP No Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
TS 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the TS feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the TS No Stream
Feed menu must be checked.
Receiver 1/2 Indicates whether a valid RF signal is being fed to the transmitter via Stream OK, Read only -
the receiver or monitor module. If a fault is indicated here, the set- No Stream
tings and displays in the Receiver and Monitor menu must be
checked.
Monitor Out For measuring purposes, any input signal can be switched to the Off, Active Maintenance No
TS Monitor Out socket (X22). The selection options for the data Input, Logical
sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option Input 1 or 2,
keys. TS Generator
Monitor Indicates which receiver module is used as the RF monitor. Off, Receiver Configuration No
1, Receiver 2
Only receiver modules which are not configured as "Logical Input"
can be selected. Changes to this settings only become effective
after the instrument has been rebooted.
This feature is available for the TLU9 if at least one receiver module
and option K25 are installed.
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input sig-
nal switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Port Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Uni- Maintenance Yes
● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the cast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
TS 1/2 Type Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21. Auto, ASI, Maintenance No
● Auto: The data format is detected automatically. SMPTE
● ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream.
● SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the IP feed. Read only -
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP/IIP/TCP+DB Depending on the selected TV standard, this indicates whether addi- Read only -
tional information for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN) is
present in the data stream.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the physical network interface of the IP Configuration No
feed. The IP address can be changed here. An IP address must also
be entered for multicast mode. Changes only become effective after
the exciter is restarted by pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
Network Mask Shows the network mask. The setting can be changed here. Configuration No
Changes only become effective after the exciter is restarted by
pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
MAC Address Shows the worldwide unique MAC address of the network interface. Read only -
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input and the IP output of the satellite receiver has been activated with option key K51.
Local IP Address Shows the logical network address of Ethernet connector X200 on Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) the satellite receiver board.
The decoded transport streams of both satellite receivers are output
via this connector.
The setting can be changed here.
Network Mask The network mask splits the IP address range into a network part Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) and an instrument part. The network masks of all computers in an
IP network should be configured the same.
MAC Address Shows the hardware address of the network adapter. It serves as a Read only -
(Monitor Out) unique ID for the instrument in a computer network.
Multicast Address The satellite receiver forwards the decrypted transport stream via IP Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) to external instruments that have subscribed to the displayed
address. The multicast address can be set separately for both satel-
lite receivers. Both data streams are output via Ethernet connector
X200.
Port (Monitor Out) Shows the UDP port to which the data stream is to be sent. 1025 to Maintenance No
65535
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Row (Monitor Shows the number of rows that are to be used for calculation of the 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Col (Monitor Shows the number of columns that are to be used for calculation of 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) the ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching
The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits
seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the
"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes
place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available
without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in
MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal
feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which
arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the
two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals
can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by
pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input
"Selected Input".
● Manual switchover after automatic switchover by automatic input signal switchover
function
The active input can be switched back to the preselected input in the "Home" >
"Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by pressing the input selector switch ("Selector")
and then selecting the desired input "Input".
Automatic (Con- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
figuration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Automatic (Con- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Read only -
figuration) ● Off: Changed
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● Active:
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only dis-
played if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, None
If "None" is set, both inputs have equal priority. This minimizes the
number of switching operations.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always
takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If "Seamless Switching" has been
set to "On" and is possible, switchover always takes place immedi-
ately without interruption regardless of the set guard time.
If "to Reserve Only" has been selected as the "Direction", the set
guard time has no effect.
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Not Possible, Read only -
Switching) Possible
"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different
data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set
"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals
with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes
place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard
Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Seamless (Seam- Activates seamless switching. If seamless switching is activated, Off/On Maintenance Yes
less Switching) "Guard Time Back" is changed to a minimum of 15 seconds.
Delay between Shows the delay time between logical input 1 and logical input 2 in 0 ms to Read only -
Inputs (Seamless ms. A positive value means that the signal at input 2 arrives later at 1000 ms
Switching) the exciter.
If Reserve Fails Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
(Reserve Control) monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Input (Selector) Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is ON, the preselected input is switched over.
"Settings" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Automatic> Settings
Mute on Input Fail Used to determine whether the output signal of the exciter is to be No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) switched off if the input signal of all available inputs fails, or whether
"null packets" are to be sent. This switch is available in multiple‑fre-
quency networks (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN),
the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal is fed.
Input Fail Detec- Indicates the speed of response to missing data packets. Normal: Normal, Fast Maintenance Yes
tion (Input Con- Bursts in the transport stream are processed without fault message
trol) (recommended setting for IP feed). Fast: This setting reduces the
response time to missing data packets. It can be selected if it is
ensured that there is a continuous data stream at the input of the
exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Detect Lost Pack- Indicates whether the monitoring of missing data packets is active. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
ets (Input Control) ● No
Single missing data packets are tolerated. Longer interruptions
of the data stream will, however, cause the input to switch over
or result in an "Input Fail".
● Yes
If the automatic input signal switchover function is ON, the
standby input becomes active as soon as a data packet is lost.
If the automatic input signal switchover function is OFF, a miss-
ing data packet will result in an "Input Fail".
The setting can be changed here.
Transparent TS Indicates whether the transport stream is routed transparently No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) through the coder or whether it can be modified during signal pro-
cessing.
● Off
Stuffing and PCR correction are active.
● On
Stuffing and PCR correction are OFF. The fed data rate must
match the required data rate.
This parameter is only available for the TV standard "DVB‑T" in
"MFN" mode and can be changed here.
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter No (Create Maintenance Yes
Changeover (On is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for Warning), Yes
Input Fail) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). (Create Fault)
● Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the
higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to
switch over to another exciter or transmitter.
● No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Fail Delay Used to set the length of the checkout time which must expire after 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(On Input Fail) detection of an input signal fault before the exciter displays a fault. If
a short checkout time is set, the system can quickly switch over to a
standby exciter if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long check-
out time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a fault to
switch to an alternative feed path so that the exciter is prevented
from switching over to a redundancy component.
For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the exciter has a function that allows
the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the SFN, time synchroni-
zation of all exciters in the network is performed using a pulse per second (PPS),
which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.
Special features
Three different operating modes are supported.
● Dynamic SFN
The time of transmission of the signal for all transmitters in a single‑frequency net-
work (SFN) is controlled relative to a common pulse per second.
● Static SFN
The time of transmission of the signal is set statically for each individual transmit-
ter. The delay time on the feed path must be constant.
● Auto
The operating mode (Dynamic SFN or Static SFN) is set automatically using trans-
mitter‑specific information in the IIP (ISDB‑T Information Packet).
● Maximum Delay
Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center (MIP inserter)
until its regular transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay is set in the SFN
adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the SFN.
● Network Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (SFN adapter) to the
input of the exciter. With IP feed, the time for forward error correction (FEC) and
packet reordering is added to the network delay. This delay depends on the used
transmission path.
● Processing Delay
Minimum transit time of the signal through the exciter. This delay depends on the
set transmission parameters.
● Dynamic Delay
Period of time by which signal processing is delayed artificially in order to achieve
the desired time of transmission.
● Total Delay
Actual transit time of the signal through the exciter. This time is the sum of Pro-
cessing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
● User Time Offset
Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter location) of
the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under
Maximum Delay. The user time offset is used to compensate for differences
between transmission systems from different manufacturers.
● IIP Time Offset
Positive or negative offset (transferred in the data stream for the individual trans-
mitter site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission
preset under Maximum Delay.
If the user time offset and IIP time offset are present at the same time, their effects
are added together.
● Dispatch Time
This is the actual time of transmission. It is the network‑wide maximum delay plus
the transmitter‑specific time offsets.
Settings
Ext. PPS (Input) Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
socket (X23) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK
Source (Input) The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of transmission External PPS, Maintenance Yes
can be selected in this list. Internal GPS
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
(Input) pulse per second (PPS). This function must have been enabled Inaccurate,
beforehand by installing an option key. OK
SFN Sync Determines the type of the synchronization for the time of transmis- Off (MFN), Maintenance Yes
sion. Dynamic
● Off (SFN): The time of transmission has not been determined. (SFN), Static
● Dynamic (SFN): The time of transmission is synchronized auto- (SFN), Auto
matically across all of the transmitters in a single-frequency net- (IIP)
work (SFN) using a SFN adapter.
● Static (SFN): The time of transmission for each of the transmit-
ters in a single-frequency network (SFN) is preset individually.
● AUTO (IIP): The type of SFN Synchronization (dynamic/static)
is set at every transmitter of the SFN automatically via the
ISDB-T Information Packet (IIP). In a static SFN, the individual
times of transmission are transmitted for each transmitter indi-
vidually via the IIP in the process.
PPS State Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized OK, Holdover, Read only -
with the frequency control. Holdover
● OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency control. expired, Miss-
● Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of the fre- ing, Not sta-
quency control have failed. Time synchronization is now per- ted
formed with the accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator
(OCXO).
● Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which the transmitter
is permitted to remain in holdover mode has expired (see the
Frequency Control menu).
● Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since the exciter
was last started.
● Not stated:
The phase angle of the PPS is not monitored in MFN mode.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control
must be checked.
Max. Deviation Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the time of trans- 0µs to 100 μs Read only -
(Time of Dispatch) mission relative to the internally controlled reference frequency. If
the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmission is recal-
culated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute).
SFN State (Time Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a SFN Resync, Read only -
of Dispatch) time‑synchronous manner. No Time
● In Time: Information,
The output signal is transmitted in a time‑synchronous manner. No Time Ref-
● SFN Resync: erence, In
SFN resynchronization is currently taking place. Time, Wrong
● No Time Information: SFN Time
No control information for the time of transmission is contained Setup, Wrong
in the data stream. Frequency
● No Time Reference: Reference
The reference feed of the time synchronization and the fre- Source, Multi-
quency control must be checked. ple Time
● Wrong SFN Time Setup:
Information,
The network delay is so high that the desired time of transmis-
Delay Unsup-
sion cannot be observed.
ported, Not
● Wrong Frequency Reference Source:
Stated
"Manual" has been selected as the frequency reference.
● Multiple Time Information:
A relative and an absolute timestamp are present in the input
data stream. The time of transmission cannot be calculated.
The corresponding settings of the DVB‑T2 gateway must be
corrected.
● Delay Unsupported:
The desired absolute time of transmission is too far in the
future. The required delay is not possible.
● Not Stated:
The time of transmission is not monitored in MFN mode.
Maximum Delay Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its regular transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay is
set at the SFN adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the
dynamic SFN.
Network Delay Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center to the 0 s to 1 s Read only -
input of the signal processing unit. This delay depends on the used
transmission path. If an IP feed is used, the FEC processing time is
a component of the network delay (not available for DVB‑T2).
Processing Time Shows the internal transit time for signal processing in the exciter. It 0 s to 1 s Read only -
depends on the set modulation parameters.
Dynamic Delay Indicates the signal delay controlled by the SFN (single‑frequency 0 s to 1 s Read only -
network) synchronization which is required in order to meet the
desired time of transmission exactly. The displayed value contains
the set static delay offset as well as the TX time offset (if available).
Total Delay Shows the total transit time of the signal through the transmitter. It is 0 s to 1 s Read only -
the sum of Processing Time plus Dynamic Delay.
Static Delay Off- Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter 0 s to 1 s Maintenance Yes
set site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of trans-
mission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to
compensate for differences between transmission systems from dif-
ferent manufacturers.
TX Offset Delay Positive or negative offset (transferred in the IIP for the individual 0 s to 1 s Read only -
transmitter location) of the time of transmission relative to the regu-
lar time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. The equip-
ment control has to be enabled for display and activation. If TX Off-
set Delay and Static Delay are active at the same time, their effects
are added together.
Dispatch Time Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its actual transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay cor-
responds to Maximum Delay (compulsory for all transmitters in an
SFN) plus Static Delay Offset plus TX Time Offset (if available).
4.5.4 ATSC
To operate the transmitter in ATSC mode, an appropriate software option must be acti-
vated using an option key.
The ATSC TV standard can be used both in single-frequency networks (SFN) and in
multiple-frequency networks (MFN). In an SFN, the time at which an ATSC symbol is
transmitted is set automatically via the transmission control protocol (TCP). The net-
work mode is selected in the SFN menu. Whether a TCP is present in the data stream
is indicated in the two Input menus.
In the Configuration menu, it is possible to activate transmission to mobile terminal
equipment and also to set the transmitter IDs for operation in a network.
"Configuration" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATSC Coder > Configuration
Mobile DTV (Con- Indicates whether the coding for Mobile DTV is switched on or off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
figuration) The setting can be changed here.
MHE PID (Config- Indicates which MHE PID is set. 0 to 8191 Maintenance Yes
uration) The setting can be changed here.
The packet ID that is set is the one containing the Mobile DTV data
stream. The MHE PID is only available if Mobile DTV has been set
to "On".
Frame Status Indicates whether the ATSC coder is synchronized using the TCP Locked, Read only -
(Configuration) frames contained in the data stream. Unlocked
A fault can occur if the fed transport stream does not contain a TCP.
In this case, the status display of the active input would signal a cor-
responding TCP fault.
Mobile Content Indicates whether mobile data is contained in the input data stream. Found, Not Read only -
(Configuration) found
This display is only available if Mobile DTV has been set to "On".
"Test" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATSC Coder > Configuration
> Settings Check tab (Test Signal)
Generate Test Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off, PRBS, Maintenance No
Signal ● Off Single Carrier
Switches off test signal generation.
● PRBS
Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload.
● Single Carrier
Generates an unmodulated single carrier.
The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band
and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the
synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF
Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out
(X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this
test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
The setting can be changed here.
Testmode Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel center frequency
must be set during this process.
With DTV, the output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be
attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
TS feed
Every exciter which is suitable for the transmission of digital TV has two transport
stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). The data format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can be set
separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also dis-
played.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
IP feed
Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-
able in the exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned
an IP address in the Task View > Inputs > TX > Exciter > TS LAN menu. The two
Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams which contain additional configu-
ration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast and multicast streams. For multi-
cast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which makes the stream available in
the network must also be specified. It is possible to assign both logical IP streams to
the same physical socket, but to specify different multicast addresses. This provides
maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy scenarios in the feed path.
The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the Inputs/TS LAN task
and only become effective after the exciter has been rebooted.
The description of the parameters is given in ""IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
Sat feed
A satellite receiver module is available as an option for the exciter. It contains two inde-
pendent receivers. Each receiver has a common interface slot that allows the signal to
be decoded. The receivers can be used directly as logical inputs in the exciter. Alterna-
tively, an additional instrument with IP or ASI input can be looped in between the satel-
lite receivers and the signal inputs of the coder.
The decoded transport stream of one of the two satellite receivers can be output via
ASI connector X400. Optionally, both satellite receivers can be used independently of
each other as multicast servers via the Ethernet connector (X200). For this purpose,
one of the two multicast addresses of the satellite receiver modules must be set at the
additional instrument.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Sat Tuner" parameters" on page 121
DVB‑T/DVB‑T2 feed
A DVBT‑T/DVB‑T2 receiver module is optionally available for the exciter. Up to two
modules can be installed in an exciter. The receivers can be used directly as logical
inputs in the exciter. For the TLU9, it is possible to use a receiver module for monitor-
ing the output signal.
Software option K25 must be installed in order to use a receiver module as a monitor-
ing receiver. The option is available for the TLU9.
Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream, IP Stream, Sat and Receiver)
This menu is only available if a TS feed has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if an IP feed has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
(Status) via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Status)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Status)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate of the multiplex contained in the IP Read only -
(Status) stream.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
FEC Row (D) Shows the number of rows in the matrix used for calculating the for- Read only -
(Status) ward error correction.
FEC Col (L) (Sta- Shows the number of columns in the matrix used for calculating the Read only -
tus) forward error correction.
FEC Row valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
FEC Col valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
(Settings) stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal
switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol (Settings) Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Maintenance Yes
(Settings) ● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the Unicast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Port (Settings) Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
IP Address (Set- Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
tings) mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Maintenance Yes
(Settings) entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Transponder Fre- Shows the set frequency of the satellite transponder if Ku band or 10700 MHz to Maintenance Yes
quency (Configu- C band has been selected for LNB mode (parameter "Band"). 12750 MHz
ration) The setting can be changed here. If the parameter "Band" has been
set to "Manual", the intermediate frequency (IF) is shown in MHz.
Band (Configura- Indicates the band in which the LNB is operating. Ku, C, Manual Maintenance Yes
tion) The setting can be changed here. This parameter determines how
the selected intermediate frequency (IF) is calculated for the DVB‑S
or DVB‑S2 tuner.
● In Ku band mode, two LNB frequencies must be entered (high
and low). The tuner automatically selects the appropriate fre-
quency band and switches on the 22 kHz tone if the higher fre-
quency band is to be used.
● In C band mode, only one LNB frequency is used. The 22 kHz
tone can be activated manually.
● If the parameter "Manual" is set, the intermediate frequency (IF)
at which the tuner is to operate can be entered directly in the
"Transponder Frequency" field.
Polarization (LNB) Shows the set polarization of the LNB. Horizontal, Maintenance Yes
Vertical
The setting can be changed here. If the LNB supply voltage ("Volt-
age") is set to Off, this parameter has no effect.
Voltage (LNB) Shows the set supply voltage for the LNB. Off, 13 V and Maintenance Yes
18 V, 14 V
The setting can be changed here. The supply voltage for switching
and 19 V
over the polarization can be increased by approx. 1 V in order to
compensate for any voltage losses along the RF cable to the LNB.
LNB Freq Low Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 9300 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) lower frequency band (Ku band only). 10200 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at.
The lower standard frequency of most LNBs is 9750 MHz.
LNB Freq High Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 10200 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) upper frequency band (Ku band only). 11000 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at. Switchover to the upper fre-
quency band is triggered by activation of a 22 kHz tone.
The upper standard frequency of most LNBs is 10600 MHz.
LNB Freq (LNB) Shows the set frequency of the local oscillator for the LNB in MHz Maintenance Yes
(C band only).
The standard frequency of most LNBs is 5150 MHz.
22kHz Tone Used to switch between the two oscillators of the LNB (C band and Off, On Maintenance Yes
(LNB) Manual only).
Tuner Frequency Shows the intermediate frequency (IF) of the tuner in MHz. This is 950 MHz to Read only -
(Tuner) the current value including all frequency offsets. 2150 MHz
Receive Power Shows the current receive power in dBm. ‒10 dBm to ‒ Read only -
(Tuner) 70 dBm
Locked (Tuner) Indicates whether the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver has synchronized Read only -
with a signal.
Drift (Drift) Shows the difference between the set transponder frequency and Read only -
the frequency of the received signal (Tuner Frequency).
Warning Limit If the difference between the receive and transponder frequency is Maintenance Yes
(Drift) greater than this limit, a warning is generated.
Status (Drift) Shows a warning if the receive frequency deviates too greatly from OK, Too High Read only -
the transponder frequency.
"Demodulator" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > Demodulator
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Coderate (Coding) Shows the current FEC code rate of the receive signal. Read only -
Bit Error Rate Shows the current bit error rate. Read only -
(Coding)
Modulation (Cod- Shows the determined modulation mode of the receive signal. QPSK, 8PSK, Read only -
ing) Unknown
TS Datarate mea- Shows the measured data rate of the transport stream in bit/s. Read only -
sured (Status)
Symbolrate (Sig- Indicates whether the symbol rate is to be determined automatically Auto, Manual Maintenance Yes
nal) or set manually. The setting can be changed here.
TS Symbol Rate Shows the set symbol rate of the expected receive signal. 0 ksymbols/ Maintenance Yes
(Signal) sec to
The setting can be changed here if "Symbol Rate" is set to "Man-
50000 ksym-
ual". If "0" is entered, the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver performs a
bols/sec
"blind search" and attempts to determine all signal parameters auto-
matically.
Signal Type (Sig- Shows the signal type (or standard) setting for the expected receive DVB-S, DVB- Maintenance Yes
nal) signal. S2, Auto
The setting can be changed here.
Standard (Signal) Shows the determined TV standard of the receive signal. DVB-S, DVB- Read only -
S2
C/N (C/N) Shows the current carrier‑to‑noise ratio. OK, Too Low Read only -
A low carrier‑to‑noise ratio can cause bit errors during demodula-
tion.
Warning Limit If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a warning is dis- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(C/N) played.
Fault Limit (C/N) If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a fault is displayed. 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Status (C/N) Indicates whether the current signal‑to‑noise ratio is below or above Read only -
the set limit.
Link Margin (Link Shows the difference between the receiver sensitivity (i.e. the Read only -
Margin) receive power at which the receiver stops operating) and the current
receive power.
A link margin of 15 dB means that the system can tolerate an addi-
tional attenuation of 15 dB between the transmitter and receiver
before it stops operating.
Warning Limit If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a warning is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(Link Margin) gered. The threshold value can be changed here.
Fault Limit (Link If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a fault is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Margin) gered. This can cause the active input of the exciter to switch over.
The threshold value can be changed here.
Status (Link Mar- Indicates whether the signal attenuation is low enough to ensure OK, Too Low, Read only -
gin) smooth operation. The threshold values as of which a warning or Fail
fault is displayed can be changed.
PLS Code 1 to 3 Shows the decryption code valid for this data stream. The code and 0 to 262143 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- PL scrambling must be the same as the values set at the scrambler
bling) in the playout. Up to three different codes can be used. If "Loop" is
activated, these codes are automatically checked for validity. The
setting can be changed here. For PLS = Gold, the valid value range
is: 0 to 262143.
PLS Mode (Pay- Indicates the form in which the polynomial for decoding the data Root, Gold Maintenance Yes
load Scrambling) stream from the displayed code is to be calculated.
The setting can be changed here.
Physical layer scrambling is disabled if PL Scrambling is set to
"Gold" and Code is set to "0".
Loop (Payload Activates the automatic check to establish which of the max. three Disable, Maintenance Yes
Scrambling) PLS codes can be used to decode the data stream. Enable
PLS Selector Used to select which of the three set PLS codes is to be used. This 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- setting is available if automatic checking of the PLS codes is
bling) switched off ("Loop = Disable").
Status (Payload Indicates the PLS code used to decode the data stream. 1, 2, 3 Read only -
Scrambling)
"CAM" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > CAM
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
CAM inserted Indicates whether a CAM is installed (CAM = Conditional Access No, Yes Read only -
(Status) Module).
TS Input (Status) Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the input Off, On Read only -
of the conditional access module.
CAM Status (Sta- Shows the current status of the condition access module. Off, On, No Read only -
tus) ● Off: CAM has been deactivated. Module, No
● On: CAM is operating. Signal, No
● No Module: No CAM is installed. Key, Need
● No Signal: No transport stream has been detected at the input MMI
of the CAM.
● No Key: No valid decryption key is programmed for the CAM.
● Need MMI: A problem has occurred that can only be rectified
using an external module reader.
TS Output (Sta- Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the out- Off, On Read only -
tus) put of the conditional access module.
Manufacturer Shows the name of the conditional access module manufacturer. Read only -
Name (Status)
Module Name Shows the name of the conditional access module. Read only -
(Status)
Reset (Status) Indicates whether the conditional access module is to be automati- Manual, Auto- Maintenance Yes
cally reset in the event of malfunctions. The setting can be changed matically
here.
Reset CAM (Sta- In the event of malfunctions, the conditional access module can be Trigger Maintenance No
tus) reset manually by pressing a button.
Enable (Encryp- Used to define how the received content is to be encrypted. Off, CI, BISS Maintenance Yes
tion) ● Off: The content is received and transmitted unencrypted.
● CI: The content is decrypted by a conditional access module
(CAM) installed in the common interface (CI).
● BISS: The content is transmitted encrypted using a basic inter-
operable scrambling system (BISS).
BISS Mode Used to define how encryption is to be performed using the basic BISS E, BISS Maintenance Yes
(Encryption) interoperable scrambling system. BISS E uses the same encryption 1
algorithm as BISS 1, except that additional encryption of the session
word takes place. The session word is the key for decryption of the
transmitted data in the receiver.
● BISS 1: Encryption is performed using a session word (SW).
● BISS E: Encryption is performed using an encrypted session
word (ESW).
Injected ID (BISS) The receiver ID is the key of the receiver and is used to encrypt the Maintenance No
encrypted session word (ESW) in BISS E mode. The ESW can thus
be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured channel so that the
receiver can decrypt the receive signal again using its own receiver
ID.
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this key can
no longer be read after it has been entered.
Encrypted Ses- In BISS E mode, the encrypted session word is the key for decryp- Maintenance No
sion (BISS) tion of the transmitted data in the receiver. The encrypted session
word is encrypted using the key of the receiver (injected ID) and can
therefore be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured connec-
tion. The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this
key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
Clear Session In BISS 1 mode, the clear session word is the key for decryption of Maintenance No
(BISS) the transmitted data in the receiver. The clear session word itself is
unencrypted and should therefore be transmitted to the receiver via
a secure connection. The setting can be changed here. For security
reasons, this key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the coder OK, No Read only -
(Transport input by the SAT receiver module. If a fault is displayed, the settings Stream
Stream) of the SAT tuner should be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
T2-MI (MIP, SIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
(Transport contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
Stream) modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
TS ID Status (Mul- Indicates whether the data stream contains one or more transport Single Read only -
tistream) streams. With multistream reception, the number of the desired data Stream, Multi-
stream must be set under "Multistream Number". stream
Multistream Num- With multistream reception, the used TS is shown here. The setting Maintenance Yes
ber (Multistream) can be changed here.
TS ID Match Indicates whether the current TS ID matches the expected TS ID. If OK, Warning Read only -
(Transport Stream the transmitted TS ID changes, a warning is issued. If the expected
ID) TS ID is set to 0, the warning is suppressed.
Expected TS ID Indicates which TS ID is expected in the input signal. If the TS 0 to 16384 Maintenance Yes
(Transport Stream changes, a warning is issued. The warning can be suppressed if the
ID) "Expected TS ID" is set to 0.
Current TS ID Shows the ID of the currently used transport stream. With multi- Read only -
(Transport Stream stream operation, the multistream number defines the active TS.
ID)
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Service Name Shows the name of the service from the service description table Read only -
(SDT).
ID Shows the ID of the service from the program association table. 0 to 65535 Read only -
PMT PID Shows the ID of the service from the program map table.
Decrypt Indicates whether this service is decrypted by the CAM. Off, On Read only -
Scrambled Indicates whether the service is marked as encrypted in the service No, Yes Read only -
description table (SDT).
"BTS" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > BTS
This menu is only available for the TV standard "ISDB‑T" if a "Sat Input" has been
assigned to at least one logical input.
BTS Decompres- Indicates whether the packet length of the broadcast transport Off, On, Fault Read only -
sion (Status) stream (BTS) is changed from 188 bytes (DVB‑S/S2 standard) to
204 bytes (ISDB‑T standard). A valid option key (K60) must be
installed in order to use this function. A fault indicates a faulty trans-
port stream.
PLI Table PID Shows the packet ID which the PLI table in the DVB‑S/S2 stream 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
(PID Insertion) contains. The setting can be changed here.
Null Packet LA Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer A contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LB Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer B contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LC Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer C contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
RF Input Level Shows the current receive power in dBm. Read only -
(Signal Quality)
RF In (Signal Indicates whether a RF signal is detected at the input. Present, Not Read only -
Quality) Present
Demodulator (Sig- Indicates whether the demodulator is synchronized with the fre- Locked, Not Read only -
nal Quality) quency of the input signal. Locked
MER (MER) The modulation error ratio describes the signal quality. Read only -
A poor MER is caused by random shifting of the constellation points
in the constellation diagram. From a certain value, a receiver can no
longer cleanly distinguish the positions of the constellation points,
resulting in picture failure points.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the MER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(MER) the measured MER drops below the set threshold value, a warning
is issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
MER Status Indicates whether the measured MER is above or below the set Off, too low, Read only -
(MER) warning threshold. OK
BER (BER) The bit error rate is a measure for signal quality. Read only -
A high BER can be caused by e.g. a low signal‑to‑noise ratio.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the BER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(BER) the measured BER exceeds the set threshold value, a warning is
issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
BER Status (BER) Indicates whether the measured BER is above or below the set Off, Too High, Read only -
warning threshold. OK
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > Receiver > Transport
Stream
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
(Transport mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated Stream
Stream) here, the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
MIP (Transport Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
Stream) contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
PLP Number Shows the selected physical layer pipe. 0 -255 Maintenance
(PLP) The setting can be changed here.
Logical Input 1/2 Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independ- Variable Maintenance Yes
ently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is
possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The
selection options for the data sources are determined by the instal-
led input interfaces and option keys.
Multiplex 1/2 A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be Maintenance Yes
Name entered here.
ASI Out Indicates which of the two signals of the satellite receiver has been Off, Sat1, Maintenance No
switched to the ASI output (X25). The setting can be changed here. Sat2
This function is only available if a satellite receiver has been
selected for at least one logical input.
IP MUX 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP No Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
TS 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the TS feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the TS No Stream
Feed menu must be checked.
Receiver 1/2 Indicates whether a valid RF signal is being fed to the transmitter via Stream OK, Read only -
the receiver or monitor module. If a fault is indicated here, the set- No Stream
tings and displays in the Receiver and Monitor menu must be
checked.
Monitor Out For measuring purposes, any input signal can be switched to the Off, Active Maintenance No
TS Monitor Out socket (X22). The selection options for the data Input, Logical
sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option Input 1 or 2,
keys. TS Generator
Monitor Indicates which receiver module is used as the RF monitor. Off, Receiver Configuration No
1, Receiver 2
Only receiver modules which are not configured as "Logical Input"
can be selected. Changes to this settings only become effective
after the instrument has been rebooted.
This feature is available for the TLU9 if at least one receiver module
and option K25 are installed.
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input sig-
nal switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Port Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Uni- Maintenance Yes
● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the cast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
TS 1/2 Type Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21. Auto, ASI, Maintenance No
● Auto: The data format is detected automatically. SMPTE
● ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream.
● SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the IP feed. Read only -
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP/IIP/TCP+DB Depending on the selected TV standard, this indicates whether addi- Read only -
tional information for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN) is
present in the data stream.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the physical network interface of the IP Configuration No
feed. The IP address can be changed here. An IP address must also
be entered for multicast mode. Changes only become effective after
the exciter is restarted by pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
Network Mask Shows the network mask. The setting can be changed here. Configuration No
Changes only become effective after the exciter is restarted by
pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
MAC Address Shows the worldwide unique MAC address of the network interface. Read only -
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input and the IP output of the satellite receiver has been activated with option key K51.
Local IP Address Shows the logical network address of Ethernet connector X200 on Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) the satellite receiver board.
The decoded transport streams of both satellite receivers are output
via this connector.
The setting can be changed here.
Network Mask The network mask splits the IP address range into a network part Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) and an instrument part. The network masks of all computers in an
IP network should be configured the same.
MAC Address Shows the hardware address of the network adapter. It serves as a Read only -
(Monitor Out) unique ID for the instrument in a computer network.
Multicast Address The satellite receiver forwards the decrypted transport stream via IP Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) to external instruments that have subscribed to the displayed
address. The multicast address can be set separately for both satel-
lite receivers. Both data streams are output via Ethernet connector
X200.
Port (Monitor Out) Shows the UDP port to which the data stream is to be sent. 1025 to Maintenance No
65535
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Row (Monitor Shows the number of rows that are to be used for calculation of the 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Col (Monitor Shows the number of columns that are to be used for calculation of 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) the ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching
The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits
seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the
"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes
place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available
without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in
MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal
feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which
arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the
two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals
can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by
pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input
"Selected Input".
● Manual switchover after automatic switchover by automatic input signal switchover
function
The active input can be switched back to the preselected input in the "Home" >
"Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by pressing the input selector switch ("Selector")
and then selecting the desired input "Input".
Automatic (Con- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
figuration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Automatic (Con- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Read only -
figuration) ● Off: Changed
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● Active:
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only dis-
played if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, None
If "None" is set, both inputs have equal priority. This minimizes the
number of switching operations.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always
takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If "Seamless Switching" has been
set to "On" and is possible, switchover always takes place immedi-
ately without interruption regardless of the set guard time.
If "to Reserve Only" has been selected as the "Direction", the set
guard time has no effect.
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Not Possible, Read only -
Switching) Possible
"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different
data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set
"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals
with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes
place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard
Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Seamless (Seam- Activates seamless switching. If seamless switching is activated, Off/On Maintenance Yes
less Switching) "Guard Time Back" is changed to a minimum of 15 seconds.
Delay between Shows the delay time between logical input 1 and logical input 2 in 0 ms to Read only -
Inputs (Seamless ms. A positive value means that the signal at input 2 arrives later at 1000 ms
Switching) the exciter.
If Reserve Fails Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
(Reserve Control) monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Input (Selector) Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is ON, the preselected input is switched over.
"Settings" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Automatic> Settings
Mute on Input Fail Used to determine whether the output signal of the exciter is to be No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) switched off if the input signal of all available inputs fails, or whether
"null packets" are to be sent. This switch is available in multiple‑fre-
quency networks (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN),
the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal is fed.
Input Fail Detec- Indicates the speed of response to missing data packets. Normal: Normal, Fast Maintenance Yes
tion (Input Con- Bursts in the transport stream are processed without fault message
trol) (recommended setting for IP feed). Fast: This setting reduces the
response time to missing data packets. It can be selected if it is
ensured that there is a continuous data stream at the input of the
exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Detect Lost Pack- Indicates whether the monitoring of missing data packets is active. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
ets (Input Control) ● No
Single missing data packets are tolerated. Longer interruptions
of the data stream will, however, cause the input to switch over
or result in an "Input Fail".
● Yes
If the automatic input signal switchover function is ON, the
standby input becomes active as soon as a data packet is lost.
If the automatic input signal switchover function is OFF, a miss-
ing data packet will result in an "Input Fail".
The setting can be changed here.
Transparent TS Indicates whether the transport stream is routed transparently No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) through the coder or whether it can be modified during signal pro-
cessing.
● Off
Stuffing and PCR correction are active.
● On
Stuffing and PCR correction are OFF. The fed data rate must
match the required data rate.
This parameter is only available for the TV standard "DVB‑T" in
"MFN" mode and can be changed here.
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter No (Create Maintenance Yes
Changeover (On is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for Warning), Yes
Input Fail) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). (Create Fault)
● Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the
higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to
switch over to another exciter or transmitter.
● No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Fail Delay Used to set the length of the checkout time which must expire after 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(On Input Fail) detection of an input signal fault before the exciter displays a fault. If
a short checkout time is set, the system can quickly switch over to a
standby exciter if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long check-
out time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a fault to
switch to an alternative feed path so that the exciter is prevented
from switching over to a redundancy component.
For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the exciter has a function that allows
the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the SFN, time synchroni-
zation of all exciters in the network is performed using a pulse per second (PPS),
which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.
Special features
● R&S Mobile
If mobile content is transmitted and a R&S AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter is
used, the "RSMobile" synchronization type must be selected.
● R&S A53
If normal content is transmitted and a R&S AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter is
used, the "RSA53" synchronization type must be selected.
● A/110
In the case of the standard‑compliant SFN synchronization in line with ATSC A/
110B, the "A/110" synchronization type must be selected. It contains a compatible
expansion to allow use of Mobile DTV.
With the synchronization types "R&S Mobile" and "A/110", a distinction is also made as
to whether the time of transmission is to be synchronized primarily using data from the
TCP information or using data from the dummy bytes.
Settings
Ext. PPS (Input) Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
socket (X23) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK
Source (Input) The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of transmis- External PPS, Maintenance Yes
sion can be selected in this list. Internal GPS
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
Input pulse per second (PPS). This function must have been enabled Inaccurate,
beforehand by installing an option key. OK
SFN Sync Used to activate time synchronization. Off (MFN), Maintenance Yes
● Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not controlled. Dynamic
● Dynamic (SFN): The time of transmission of a symbol is the (SFN)
same for all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network
(SFN).
SFN Sync Mode Used to define the type of time synchronization. This switch is avail- RSMobile, Maintenance Yes
able only after the appropriate software options have been enabled. RSA53, A/110
● RSMobile: For transmitting mobile content and when using a
R&S AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter.
● RSA53: When transmitting normal content and when using a
R&S AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter.
● A/110: For standard‑compliant SFN synchronization in line with
ATSC A/110B. It contains a compatible expansion to allow use
of Mobile DTV.
With the synchronization types "R&S Mobile" and "A/110", a distinc-
tion can also be made as to whether the time of transmission is to
be synchronized primarily using data from the TCP information or
using data from the dummy bytes.
PPS State Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized OK, Holdover, Read only -
with the frequency control. Holdover
● OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency con- expired, Miss-
trol. ing
● Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of the fre-
quency control have failed. Time synchronization is now per-
formed with the accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator
(OCXO).
● Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which the transmitter
is permitted to remain in holdover mode has expired (see the
Frequency Control menu).
● Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since the exciter
was last started.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control
must be checked.
Max. Deviation Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the time of trans- 0µs to 100 μs Read only -
(Time of Dispatch) mission relative to the internally controlled reference frequency. If
the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmission is recal-
culated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute).
SFN State (Time Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a SFN Resync, Read only -
of Dispatch) time‑synchronous manner. If the "No Time Reference" error mes- No Time Infor-
sage is displayed, the reference feed of the time synchronization mation, No
and the frequency control must be checked. If the "No Time Infor- Time Refer-
mation" fault message is displayed, it must be checked whether the ence, SFN
control information for the time of transmission is contained in the Resync, In
data stream. (See the "Input" menu.) Time
Maximum Delay Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its regular transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay is
set at the SFN adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the
dynamic SFN.
Network Delay Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center to the 0 s to 1 s Read only -
input of the signal processing unit. This delay depends on the used
transmission path. If an IP feed is used, the FEC processing time is
a component of the network delay.
Processing Delay Shows the internal transit time for signal processing in the exciter. It 0 s to 1 s Read only -
depends on the set modulation parameters.
Dynamic Delay Indicates the signal delay controlled by the SFN (single‑frequency 0 s to 1 s Read only -
network) synchronization which is required in order to meet the
desired time of transmission exactly. The displayed value contains
the set static delay offset as well as the TX time offset (if available).
Total Delay Shows the total transit time of the signal through the transmitter. It is 0 s to 1 s Read only -
the sum of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
Static SFN Delay Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter 0 s to 1 s Maintenance Yes
site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of trans-
mission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to
compensate for differences between transmission systems from dif-
ferent manufacturers.
Dispatch Time Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its actual transmission at the transmit antenna. This delay corre-
sponds to Maximum Delay (compulsory for all transmitters in an
SFN) plus Static Delay Offset plus TX Time Offset (if available).
4.5.5 DTMB
To operate the transmitter in DTMB mode, an appropriate software option must be acti-
vated using an option key.
The DTMB transmission parameters required for coding and modulation as well as the
TPS settings (TPS = transmission parameter signaling) used and signaled during
transmission can be checked in the "Config" and "Modulation" menu fields.
The DTMB standard can be used both in single-frequency networks (SFN) and multi-
ple-frequency networks (MFN). In SFNs, the TPSs are usually set automatically by the
megaframe information packet (MIP) or second frame initialization packet (SIP); in
MFNs, the TPS parameters are usually set manually.
In the Localization menu, a time offset can be set automatically (via MIP/SIP) for each
transmitter of a network individually. This is activated by setting "TX Control" to "On"
and by defining a transmitter address that is unique in the SFN.
In the TPS Settings menu, the TPS transmission parameters can be configured man-
ually. The modulation parameters effective in the coder are displayed under "Active
TPS Settings".
"Config" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter A or B > Exciter > DTMB Coder > Config
TPS Source (Con- Shows the source set for the TPS parameters (TPS = transmission MIP, SIP, Maintenance Yes
figuration) parameter signaling). Manual
The following are possible sources: MIP (megaframe initialization
packet), SIP (second frame initialization packet) or manually
selected default settings.
The setting can be changed here.
Infopacket Indicates whether the information packets (MIP or SIP) should be Off, On Maintenance Yes
Replacement contained in the output data stream (Off) or replaced by null packets
(Configuration) (On).
The setting can be changed here.
TX Delay Offset Indicates the number of microseconds by which this transmitter is to ‒3276.8 µs Read only -
(Localization) shift the time of transmission of its signal relative to other transmit- to 3276.8 µs
ters in the DTMB network.
This value is set via the MIP or SIP.
"Modulation" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter A or B > Exciter > DTMB Coder > Modu-
lation
Bandwidth (Man- Shows the set channel bandwidth occupied by the DTMB signal in 6 MHz, Maintenance Yes
ual TPS Settings) the frequency spectrum. 7 MHz, 8 MHz
6 MHz, 7 MHz or 8 MHz can be set. The selected frequency
depends on the required bandwidth of the channel to be transmitted.
Coderate (Manual Shows the set code rate. 4/10, 6/10, Maintenance Yes
TPS Settings) 8/10
The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to <error
correction values + information data>. 4/10 provides the greatest
error correction and the lowest data transfer rate; 8/10 provides the
lowest error correction and the greatest data transfer rate.
The displayed value can be changed if Manual was selected as the
TPS source.
Carrier Mode Indicates whether the signal should be transmitted in single carrier Single, Multi Maintenance Yes
(Manual TPS Set- mode (previously: ADTB-T) or in multicarrier mode (previously:
tings) DMB-T) with 3780 single carriers.
Guard Interval PN Indicates which PN sequence (pseudo random noise sequence) is Variable, con- Maintenance Yes
(Manual TPS Set- used for the guard interval. stant
tings) ● Constant:
The PN sequence "Index 0" is always used.
● Variable:
All PN sequences will be used.
The setting can be changed here.
Guard Interval Shows the padding mode for the guard interval. PN 420, PN Maintenance Yes
(Manual TPS Set- 595, PN 945
The displayed value can be changed if "Manual" was selected as the
tings) TPS source.
Time Interleaver Shows the selected mode for the time interleaver. Off, 240, 720 Maintenance Yes
(Manual TPS Set- The time interleaver distributes the payload data over many symbols
tings) in order to reduce noise sensitivity. The setting "720 symbols" is rec-
ommended for a high error tolerance. If, on the other hand, the
resulting delay is to be kept short, the setting "240 symbols" is more
suitable.
The displayed value can be changed if "Manual" was selected as the
TPS source.
Dual Pilot Tone Indicates whether two additional pilot signals are to be inserted into Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Manual TPS Set- the spectrum.
tings) The pilot tones are at ±1/2 symbol rate.
The setting can be changed here.
This parameter is effective only if "Carrier Mode" has been set to
"Single".
Bandwidth (Active Shows the channel bandwidth of the output signal. 6 MHz, Read only -
TPS Settings) 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Coderate (Active Shows the code rate of the output signal. 4/10, 6/10, Read only -
TPS Settings) 8/10
Constellation Shows the code rate of the output signal. 4QAM-NR, Read only -
(Active TPS Set- 4QAM,
tings) 16QAM,
32QAM,
64QAM
Carrier Mode Indicates whether the signal should be transmitted in single carrier Single, Multi Read only -
(Active TPS Set- mode (previously: ADTB-T) or in multicarrier mode (previously:
tings) DMB-T) with 3780 single carriers.
Guard Interval PN Indicates which PN sequence (pseudo random noise sequence) is Variable, con- Read only -
(Active TPS Set- used for the guard interval. stant
tings) ● Constant:
The PN sequence "Index 0" is always used.
● Variable:
All PN sequences will be used.
Guard Interval Shows the padding mode for the guard interval in the output signal. PN 420, PN Read only -
(Active TPS Set- 595, PN 945
tings)
Time Interleaver Indicates over how many symbols the payload data is distributed by Off, 240, 720 Read only -
(Active TPS Set- the time interleaver.
tings)
Dual Pilot Tone Indicates whether two additional pilot signals are to be inserted into Off, On Read only -
(Active TPS Set- the spectrum.
tings) The pilot signals are at ±1/2 symbol rate.
This parameter is effective only if "Carrier Mode" has been set to
"Single".
"Test" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DTMB Coder > Test
Generate Test Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off, PRBS, Maintenance No
Signal ● Off Single Carrier
Switches off test signal generation.
● PRBS
Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload.
● Single Carrier
Generates an unmodulated single carrier.
The frequency of the single carrier is in the band center.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the
synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF
Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out
(X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this
test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
The selection can be changed here.
Carrier Power Shows the level of the single carrier. 0 to 255 Maintenance Yes
This parameter is effective only if "Carrier Mode" has been set to
"Single".
The selection can be changed here.
Testmode Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel center frequency
must be set during this process.
With DTV, the output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be
attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
TS feed
Every exciter which is suitable for the transmission of digital TV has two transport
stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). The data format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can be set
separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also dis-
played.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
IP feed
Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-
able in the exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned
an IP address in the Task View > Inputs > TX > Exciter > TS LAN menu. The two
Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams which contain additional configu-
ration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast and multicast streams. For multi-
cast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which makes the stream available in
the network must also be specified. It is possible to assign both logical IP streams to
the same physical socket, but to specify different multicast addresses. This provides
maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy scenarios in the feed path.
The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the Inputs/TS LAN task
and only become effective after the exciter has been rebooted.
The description of the parameters is given in ""IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters"
on page 119
Sat feed
A satellite receiver module is available as an option for the exciter. It contains two inde-
pendent receivers. Each receiver has a common interface slot that allows the signal to
be decoded. The receivers can be used directly as logical inputs in the exciter. Alterna-
tively, an additional instrument with IP or ASI input can be looped in between the satel-
lite receivers and the signal inputs of the coder.
The decoded transport stream of one of the two satellite receivers can be output via
ASI connector X400. Optionally, both satellite receivers can be used independently of
each other as multicast servers via the Ethernet connector (X200). For this purpose,
one of the two multicast addresses of the satellite receiver modules must be set at the
additional instrument.
The description of the parameters is given in ""Sat Tuner" parameters" on page 121
DVB‑T/DVB‑T2 feed
A DVBT‑T/DVB‑T2 receiver module is optionally available for the exciter. Up to two
modules can be installed in an exciter. The receivers can be used directly as logical
inputs in the exciter. For the TLU9, it is possible to use a receiver module for monitor-
ing the output signal.
Software option K25 must be installed in order to use a receiver module as a monitor-
ing receiver. The option is available for the TLU9.
Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream, IP Stream, Sat and Receiver)
This menu is only available if a TS feed has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if an IP feed has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
(Status) via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Status)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Status)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate of the multiplex contained in the IP Read only -
(Status) stream.
Datarate Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
MIP (SIP, IIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the transport
stream.
FEC Row (D) Shows the number of rows in the matrix used for calculating the for- Read only -
(Status) ward error correction.
FEC Col (L) (Sta- Shows the number of columns in the matrix used for calculating the Read only -
tus) forward error correction.
FEC Row valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
FEC Col valid Shows a warning if faults in the input signal cannot be corrected. No, Yes Read only -
(Status)
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
(Settings) stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal
switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol (Settings) Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Maintenance Yes
(Settings) ● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the Unicast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Port (Settings) Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
IP Address (Set- Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
tings) mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Maintenance Yes
(Settings) entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview ters>
and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switch-
over function.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Transponder Fre- Shows the set frequency of the satellite transponder if Ku band or 10700 MHz to Maintenance Yes
quency (Configu- C band has been selected for LNB mode (parameter "Band"). 12750 MHz
ration) The setting can be changed here. If the parameter "Band" has been
set to "Manual", the intermediate frequency (IF) is shown in MHz.
Band (Configura- Indicates the band in which the LNB is operating. Ku, C, Manual Maintenance Yes
tion) The setting can be changed here. This parameter determines how
the selected intermediate frequency (IF) is calculated for the DVB‑S
or DVB‑S2 tuner.
● In Ku band mode, two LNB frequencies must be entered (high
and low). The tuner automatically selects the appropriate fre-
quency band and switches on the 22 kHz tone if the higher fre-
quency band is to be used.
● In C band mode, only one LNB frequency is used. The 22 kHz
tone can be activated manually.
● If the parameter "Manual" is set, the intermediate frequency (IF)
at which the tuner is to operate can be entered directly in the
"Transponder Frequency" field.
Polarization (LNB) Shows the set polarization of the LNB. Horizontal, Maintenance Yes
Vertical
The setting can be changed here. If the LNB supply voltage ("Volt-
age") is set to Off, this parameter has no effect.
Voltage (LNB) Shows the set supply voltage for the LNB. Off, 13 V and Maintenance Yes
18 V, 14 V
The setting can be changed here. The supply voltage for switching
and 19 V
over the polarization can be increased by approx. 1 V in order to
compensate for any voltage losses along the RF cable to the LNB.
LNB Freq Low Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 9300 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) lower frequency band (Ku band only). 10200 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at.
The lower standard frequency of most LNBs is 9750 MHz.
LNB Freq High Shows the set frequency for the local oscillator of the LNB for the 10200 MHz to Maintenance Yes
(LNB) upper frequency band (Ku band only). 11000 MHz
The setting can be changed here. On the basis of the set trans-
ponder frequency, the software determines which of the two LNB
frequencies the LNB is to operate at. Switchover to the upper fre-
quency band is triggered by activation of a 22 kHz tone.
The upper standard frequency of most LNBs is 10600 MHz.
LNB Freq (LNB) Shows the set frequency of the local oscillator for the LNB in MHz Maintenance Yes
(C band only).
The standard frequency of most LNBs is 5150 MHz.
22kHz Tone Used to switch between the two oscillators of the LNB (C band and Off, On Maintenance Yes
(LNB) Manual only).
Tuner Frequency Shows the intermediate frequency (IF) of the tuner in MHz. This is 950 MHz to Read only -
(Tuner) the current value including all frequency offsets. 2150 MHz
Receive Power Shows the current receive power in dBm. ‒10 dBm to ‒ Read only -
(Tuner) 70 dBm
Locked (Tuner) Indicates whether the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver has synchronized Read only -
with a signal.
Drift (Drift) Shows the difference between the set transponder frequency and Read only -
the frequency of the received signal (Tuner Frequency).
Warning Limit If the difference between the receive and transponder frequency is Maintenance Yes
(Drift) greater than this limit, a warning is generated.
Status (Drift) Shows a warning if the receive frequency deviates too greatly from OK, Too High Read only -
the transponder frequency.
"Demodulator" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > Demodulator
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Coderate (Coding) Shows the current FEC code rate of the receive signal. Read only -
Bit Error Rate Shows the current bit error rate. Read only -
(Coding)
Modulation (Cod- Shows the determined modulation mode of the receive signal. QPSK, 8PSK, Read only -
ing) Unknown
TS Datarate mea- Shows the measured data rate of the transport stream in bit/s. Read only -
sured (Status)
Symbolrate (Sig- Indicates whether the symbol rate is to be determined automatically Auto, Manual Maintenance Yes
nal) or set manually. The setting can be changed here.
TS Symbol Rate Shows the set symbol rate of the expected receive signal. 0 ksymbols/ Maintenance Yes
(Signal) sec to
The setting can be changed here if "Symbol Rate" is set to "Man-
50000 ksym-
ual". If "0" is entered, the DVB‑S or DVB‑S2 receiver performs a
bols/sec
"blind search" and attempts to determine all signal parameters auto-
matically.
Signal Type (Sig- Shows the signal type (or standard) setting for the expected receive DVB-S, DVB- Maintenance Yes
nal) signal. S2, Auto
The setting can be changed here.
Standard (Signal) Shows the determined TV standard of the receive signal. DVB-S, DVB- Read only -
S2
C/N (C/N) Shows the current carrier‑to‑noise ratio. OK, Too Low Read only -
A low carrier‑to‑noise ratio can cause bit errors during demodula-
tion.
Warning Limit If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a warning is dis- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(C/N) played.
Fault Limit (C/N) If the signal‑to‑noise ratio falls below this value, a fault is displayed. 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Status (C/N) Indicates whether the current signal‑to‑noise ratio is below or above Read only -
the set limit.
Link Margin (Link Shows the difference between the receiver sensitivity (i.e. the Read only -
Margin) receive power at which the receiver stops operating) and the current
receive power.
A link margin of 15 dB means that the system can tolerate an addi-
tional attenuation of 15 dB between the transmitter and receiver
before it stops operating.
Warning Limit If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a warning is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
(Link Margin) gered. The threshold value can be changed here.
Fault Limit (Link If the value is below the displayed threshold value, a fault is trig- 20 dB to 0 dB Maintenance Yes
Margin) gered. This can cause the active input of the exciter to switch over.
The threshold value can be changed here.
Status (Link Mar- Indicates whether the signal attenuation is low enough to ensure OK, Too Low, Read only -
gin) smooth operation. The threshold values as of which a warning or Fail
fault is displayed can be changed.
PLS Code 1 to 3 Shows the decryption code valid for this data stream. The code and 0 to 262143 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- PL scrambling must be the same as the values set at the scrambler
bling) in the playout. Up to three different codes can be used. If "Loop" is
activated, these codes are automatically checked for validity. The
setting can be changed here. For PLS = Gold, the valid value range
is: 0 to 262143.
PLS Mode (Pay- Indicates the form in which the polynomial for decoding the data Root, Gold Maintenance Yes
load Scrambling) stream from the displayed code is to be calculated.
The setting can be changed here.
Physical layer scrambling is disabled if PL Scrambling is set to
"Gold" and Code is set to "0".
Loop (Payload Activates the automatic check to establish which of the max. three Disable, Maintenance Yes
Scrambling) PLS codes can be used to decode the data stream. Enable
PLS Selector Used to select which of the three set PLS codes is to be used. This 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Yes
(Payload Scram- setting is available if automatic checking of the PLS codes is
bling) switched off ("Loop = Disable").
Status (Payload Indicates the PLS code used to decode the data stream. 1, 2, 3 Read only -
Scrambling)
"CAM" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Sat Input > CAM
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
CAM inserted Indicates whether a CAM is installed (CAM = Conditional Access No, Yes Read only -
(Status) Module).
TS Input (Status) Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the input Off, On Read only -
of the conditional access module.
CAM Status (Sta- Shows the current status of the condition access module. Off, On, No Read only -
tus) ● Off: CAM has been deactivated. Module, No
● On: CAM is operating. Signal, No
● No Module: No CAM is installed. Key, Need
● No Signal: No transport stream has been detected at the input MMI
of the CAM.
● No Key: No valid decryption key is programmed for the CAM.
● Need MMI: A problem has occurred that can only be rectified
using an external module reader.
TS Output (Sta- Indicates whether a transport stream has been detected at the out- Off, On Read only -
tus) put of the conditional access module.
Manufacturer Shows the name of the conditional access module manufacturer. Read only -
Name (Status)
Module Name Shows the name of the conditional access module. Read only -
(Status)
Reset (Status) Indicates whether the conditional access module is to be automati- Manual, Auto- Maintenance Yes
cally reset in the event of malfunctions. The setting can be changed matically
here.
Reset CAM (Sta- In the event of malfunctions, the conditional access module can be Trigger Maintenance No
tus) reset manually by pressing a button.
Enable (Encryp- Used to define how the received content is to be encrypted. Off, CI, BISS Maintenance Yes
tion) ● Off: The content is received and transmitted unencrypted.
● CI: The content is decrypted by a conditional access module
(CAM) installed in the common interface (CI).
● BISS: The content is transmitted encrypted using a basic inter-
operable scrambling system (BISS).
BISS Mode Used to define how encryption is to be performed using the basic BISS E, BISS Maintenance Yes
(Encryption) interoperable scrambling system. BISS E uses the same encryption 1
algorithm as BISS 1, except that additional encryption of the session
word takes place. The session word is the key for decryption of the
transmitted data in the receiver.
● BISS 1: Encryption is performed using a session word (SW).
● BISS E: Encryption is performed using an encrypted session
word (ESW).
Injected ID (BISS) The receiver ID is the key of the receiver and is used to encrypt the Maintenance No
encrypted session word (ESW) in BISS E mode. The ESW can thus
be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured channel so that the
receiver can decrypt the receive signal again using its own receiver
ID.
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this key can
no longer be read after it has been entered.
Encrypted Ses- In BISS E mode, the encrypted session word is the key for decryp- Maintenance No
sion (BISS) tion of the transmitted data in the receiver. The encrypted session
word is encrypted using the key of the receiver (injected ID) and can
therefore be transmitted to the receiver via an unsecured connec-
tion. The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this
key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
Clear Session In BISS 1 mode, the clear session word is the key for decryption of Maintenance No
(BISS) the transmitted data in the receiver. The clear session word itself is
unencrypted and should therefore be transmitted to the receiver via
a secure connection. The setting can be changed here. For security
reasons, this key can no longer be read after it has been entered.
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the coder OK, No Read only -
(Transport input by the SAT receiver module. If a fault is displayed, the settings Stream
Stream) of the SAT tuner should be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
T2-MI (MIP, SIP) Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
(Transport contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
Stream) modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
TS ID Status (Mul- Indicates whether the data stream contains one or more transport Single Read only -
tistream) streams. With multistream reception, the number of the desired data Stream, Multi-
stream must be set under "Multistream Number". stream
Multistream Num- With multistream reception, the used TS is shown here. The setting Maintenance Yes
ber (Multistream) can be changed here.
TS ID Match Indicates whether the current TS ID matches the expected TS ID. If OK, Warning Read only -
(Transport Stream the transmitted TS ID changes, a warning is issued. If the expected
ID) TS ID is set to 0, the warning is suppressed.
Expected TS ID Indicates which TS ID is expected in the input signal. If the TS 0 to 16384 Maintenance Yes
(Transport Stream changes, a warning is issued. The warning can be suppressed if the
ID) "Expected TS ID" is set to 0.
Current TS ID Shows the ID of the currently used transport stream. With multi- Read only -
(Transport Stream stream operation, the multistream number defines the active TS.
ID)
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input.
Service Name Shows the name of the service from the service description table Read only -
(SDT).
ID Shows the ID of the service from the program association table. 0 to 65535 Read only -
PMT PID Shows the ID of the service from the program map table.
Decrypt Indicates whether this service is decrypted by the CAM. Off, On Read only -
Scrambled Indicates whether the service is marked as encrypted in the service No, Yes Read only -
description table (SDT).
"BTS" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > BTS
This menu is only available for the TV standard "ISDB‑T" if a "Sat Input" has been
assigned to at least one logical input.
BTS Decompres- Indicates whether the packet length of the broadcast transport Off, On, Fault Read only -
sion (Status) stream (BTS) is changed from 188 bytes (DVB‑S/S2 standard) to
204 bytes (ISDB‑T standard). A valid option key (K60) must be
installed in order to use this function. A fault indicates a faulty trans-
port stream.
PLI Table PID Shows the packet ID which the PLI table in the DVB‑S/S2 stream 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
(PID Insertion) contains. The setting can be changed here.
Null Packet LA Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer A contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LB Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer B contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
Null Packet LC Shows the packet ID which the payload for layer C contains. The 0 to 8191 Maintenance -
PID (PID Inser- setting can be changed here.
tion)
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
RF Input Level Shows the current receive power in dBm. Read only -
(Signal Quality)
RF In (Signal Indicates whether a RF signal is detected at the input. Present, Not Read only -
Quality) Present
Demodulator (Sig- Indicates whether the demodulator is synchronized with the fre- Locked, Not Read only -
nal Quality) quency of the input signal. Locked
MER (MER) The modulation error ratio describes the signal quality. Read only -
A poor MER is caused by random shifting of the constellation points
in the constellation diagram. From a certain value, a receiver can no
longer cleanly distinguish the positions of the constellation points,
resulting in picture failure points.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the MER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(MER) the measured MER drops below the set threshold value, a warning
is issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
MER Status Indicates whether the measured MER is above or below the set Off, too low, Read only -
(MER) warning threshold. OK
BER (BER) The bit error rate is a measure for signal quality. Read only -
A high BER can be caused by e.g. a low signal‑to‑noise ratio.
Warning Limit A warning threshold can be defined for the BER measurement. If 0 dB to 50 dB Maintenance No
(BER) the measured BER exceeds the set threshold value, a warning is
issued and additionally recorded in the logbook.
BER Status (BER) Indicates whether the measured BER is above or below the set Off, Too High, Read only -
warning threshold. OK
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input > Receiver > Transport
Stream
This menu is only available if a receiver has been assigned to at least one logical input.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
(Transport mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated Stream
Stream) here, the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
MIP (Transport Indicates whether the control information required for SFN mode is OK, No, Fail Read only -
Stream) contained in the data stream. The displayed name depends on the
modulation standard. A fault can also be displayed in MFN mode if
the coder settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-
port stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the TS feed including stuffing bytes. 1200000 bps Read only -
(Transport
Stream)
Payload Datarate Shows the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS Read only -
(Transport feed. This value is only available if MFN is set (multiple‑frequency
Stream) network), i.e. SFN mode (single‑frequency network) must be set to
OFF.
Datarate (Trans- Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches the selected OK, Too Low, Read only -
port Stream) coder settings. Too High, No
Signal
Multiplex Name A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be <20 charac- Operation Yes
(Transport entered here. ters>
Stream)
PLP Number Shows the selected physical layer pipe. 0 -255 Maintenance
(PLP) The setting can be changed here.
Logical Input 1/2 Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independ- Variable Maintenance Yes
ently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is
possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The
selection options for the data sources are determined by the instal-
led input interfaces and option keys.
Multiplex 1/2 A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be Maintenance Yes
Name entered here.
ASI Out Indicates which of the two signals of the satellite receiver has been Off, Sat1, Maintenance No
switched to the ASI output (X25). The setting can be changed here. Sat2
This function is only available if a satellite receiver has been
selected for at least one logical input.
IP MUX 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP No Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
TS 1/2 Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
via the TS feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the TS No Stream
Feed menu must be checked.
Receiver 1/2 Indicates whether a valid RF signal is being fed to the transmitter via Stream OK, Read only -
the receiver or monitor module. If a fault is indicated here, the set- No Stream
tings and displays in the Receiver and Monitor menu must be
checked.
Monitor Out For measuring purposes, any input signal can be switched to the Off, Active Maintenance No
TS Monitor Out socket (X22). The selection options for the data Input, Logical
sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option Input 1 or 2,
keys. TS Generator
Monitor Indicates which receiver module is used as the RF monitor. Off, Receiver Configuration No
1, Receiver 2
Only receiver modules which are not configured as "Logical Input"
can be selected. Changes to this settings only become effective
after the instrument has been rebooted.
This feature is available for the TLU9 if at least one receiver module
and option K25 are installed.
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS LAN1, TS Maintenance No
stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN2
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input sig-
nal switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
Protocol Used to select the used network protocol. Auto, UDP, Maintenance Yes
● UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connectionless com- RTP
munication.
● RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑oriented commu-
nication.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Port Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter OK, No Read only -
via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings of the IP Stream
stream and the Ethernet interface must be checked.
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Uni- Maintenance Yes
● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the cast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed. 1200000 bps Read only -
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the IP stream. Read only -
TS 1/2 Type Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21. Auto, ASI, Maintenance No
● Auto: The data format is detected automatically. SMPTE
● ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream.
● SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream.
Gross Datarate Shows the total data rate on the IP feed. Read only -
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed to the trans- OK, No Read only -
mitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If a fault is indicated here, Stream
the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE) must be checked first.
Packet Length Shows the detected packet length of the transport stream. Read only -
MIP/IIP/TCP+DB Depending on the selected TV standard, this indicates whether addi- Read only -
tional information for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN) is
present in the data stream.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the physical network interface of the IP Configuration No
feed. The IP address can be changed here. An IP address must also
be entered for multicast mode. Changes only become effective after
the exciter is restarted by pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
Network Mask Shows the network mask. The setting can be changed here. Configuration No
Changes only become effective after the exciter is restarted by
pressing the "Set and Reboot" key.
MAC Address Shows the worldwide unique MAC address of the network interface. Read only -
This menu is only available if a "Sat Input" has been assigned to at least one logical
input and the IP output of the satellite receiver has been activated with option key K51.
Local IP Address Shows the logical network address of Ethernet connector X200 on Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) the satellite receiver board.
The decoded transport streams of both satellite receivers are output
via this connector.
The setting can be changed here.
Network Mask The network mask splits the IP address range into a network part Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) and an instrument part. The network masks of all computers in an
IP network should be configured the same.
MAC Address Shows the hardware address of the network adapter. It serves as a Read only -
(Monitor Out) unique ID for the instrument in a computer network.
Multicast Address The satellite receiver forwards the decrypted transport stream via IP Maintenance No
(Monitor Out) to external instruments that have subscribed to the displayed
address. The multicast address can be set separately for both satel-
lite receivers. Both data streams are output via Ethernet connector
X200.
Port (Monitor Out) Shows the UDP port to which the data stream is to be sent. 1025 to Maintenance No
65535
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Row (Monitor Shows the number of rows that are to be used for calculation of the 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
FEC Col (Monitor Shows the number of columns that are to be used for calculation of 4 to 10 Maintenance No
Out) the ProMPEG forward error correction.
The setting can be made separately for both satellite receivers.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching
The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits
seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the
"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes
place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available
without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in
MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal
feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which
arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the
two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals
can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
Automatic (Con- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
figuration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Automatic (Con- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Read only -
figuration) ● Off: Changed
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● Active:
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only dis-
played if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, None
If "None" is set, both inputs have equal priority. This minimizes the
number of switching operations.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always
takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If "Seamless Switching" has been
set to "On" and is possible, switchover always takes place immedi-
ately without interruption regardless of the set guard time.
If "to Reserve Only" has been selected as the "Direction", the set
guard time has no effect.
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
For DVB‑T2 transmitters with T2‑MI feed, this function is not availa-
ble if "Seamless Switching" is activated.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Not Possible, Read only -
Switching) Possible
"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different
data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set
"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals
with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes
place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard
Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Seamless (Seam- Activates seamless switching. If seamless switching is activated, Off/On Maintenance Yes
less Switching) "Guard Time Back" is changed to a minimum of 15 seconds.
Delay between Shows the delay time between logical input 1 and logical input 2 in 0 ms to Read only -
Inputs (Seamless ms. A positive value means that the signal at input 2 arrives later at 1000 ms
Switching) the exciter.
If Reserve Fails Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
(Reserve Control) monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Input (Selector) Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is ON, the preselected input is switched over.
"Settings" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Automatic> Settings
Mute on Input Fail Used to determine whether the output signal of the exciter is to be No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) switched off if the input signal of all available inputs fails, or whether
"null packets" are to be sent. This switch is available in multiple‑fre-
quency networks (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN),
the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal is fed.
Input Fail Detec- Indicates the speed of response to missing data packets. Normal: Normal, Fast Maintenance Yes
tion (Input Con- Bursts in the transport stream are processed without fault message
trol) (recommended setting for IP feed). Fast: This setting reduces the
response time to missing data packets. It can be selected if it is
ensured that there is a continuous data stream at the input of the
exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Detect Lost Pack- Indicates whether the monitoring of missing data packets is active. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
ets (Input Control) ● No
Single missing data packets are tolerated. Longer interruptions
of the data stream will, however, cause the input to switch over
or result in an "Input Fail".
● Yes
If the automatic input signal switchover function is ON, the
standby input becomes active as soon as a data packet is lost.
If the automatic input signal switchover function is OFF, a miss-
ing data packet will result in an "Input Fail".
The setting can be changed here.
Transparent TS Indicates whether the transport stream is routed transparently No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) through the coder or whether it can be modified during signal pro-
cessing.
● Off
Stuffing and PCR correction are active.
● On
Stuffing and PCR correction are OFF. The fed data rate must
match the required data rate.
This parameter is only available for the TV standard "DVB‑T" in
"MFN" mode and can be changed here.
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter No (Create Maintenance Yes
Changeover (On is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for Warning), Yes
Input Fail) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). (Create Fault)
● Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the
higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to
switch over to another exciter or transmitter.
● No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Fail Delay Used to set the length of the checkout time which must expire after 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(On Input Fail) detection of an input signal fault before the exciter displays a fault. If
a short checkout time is set, the system can quickly switch over to a
standby exciter if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long check-
out time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a fault to
switch to an alternative feed path so that the exciter is prevented
from switching over to a redundancy component.
For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the R&S TCE900/901 exciter has a
function that allows the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the
SFN, time synchronization of all exciters in the network is performed using a pulse per
second (PPS), which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.
Settings
Source The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of transmission External PPS, Maintenance Yes
can be selected in this list. Internal GPS
Ext. PPS Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
socket (X23) at the R&S TCE900/901. Inaccurate,
OK
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
pulse per second (PPS). This function must be enabled by installing Inaccurate,
an option key in the R&S TCE900/901. OK
SFN Sync Used to activate time synchronization. On (SFN), Off Maintenance Yes
● Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not controlled. (MFN)
● SFN (MIP): The time of transmission of a symbol is the same
for all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network (SFN). The
time of transmission signaled by the megaframe information
packet is used.
● SFN (SIP): The time of transmission of a symbol is the same
for all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network (SFN). The
time of transmission signaled by the session initiation protocol
is used.
PPS State Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized OK, Hold- Read only -
with the frequency control. over, Hold-
● OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency control. over expired,
● Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of the fre- Missing
quency control have failed. Time synchronization is now per-
formed with the accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator
(OCXO).
● Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which the transmitter
is permitted to remain in holdover mode has expired (see the
Frequency Control menu).
● Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since the
R&S TCE900/901 exciter was last started.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control
must be checked.
Max. Deviation Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the time of trans- 0μs to 100 μs Read only -
mission relative to the internally controlled reference frequency. If
the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmission is recal-
culated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute).
SFN State Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a SFN Resync, Read only -
time‑synchronous manner. If the "No Time Reference" error mes- No Time
sage is displayed, the reference feed of the time synchronization Information,
and the frequency control must be checked. If the "No Time Informa- No Time Ref-
tion" fault message is displayed, it must be checked whether the erence, SFN
control information for the time of transmission is contained in the Resync, In
data stream. (See the "Input" menu.) Time
Maximum Delay Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its regular transmission at the antenna. This delay is set at the
SFN adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the dynamic
SFN.
Network Delay Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center to the 0 s to 1 s Read only -
input of the signal processing unit. This delay depends on the used
transmission path. If an IP feed is used, the FEC processing time is
a component of the network delay.
Processing Delay Shows the internal transit time for signal processing in the exciter. It 0 s to 1 s Read only -
depends on the set modulation parameters.
Dynamic Delay Indicates the signal delay controlled by the SFN (single‑frequency 0 s to 1 s Read only -
network) synchronization which is required in order to meet the
desired time of transmission exactly. The displayed value contains
the set static delay offset as well as the TX time offset (if available).
Total Delay Shows the total transit time of the signal through the transmitter. It is 0 s to 1 s Read only -
the sum of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
Static Delay Offset Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter 0 s to 1 s Maintenance Yes
site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of trans-
mission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to
compensate for differences between transmission systems from dif-
ferent manufacturers.
TX Offset Delay Positive or negative offset (transferred in the MIP for the individual 0 s to 1 s Read only -
transmitter location) of the time of transmission relative to the regu-
lar time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. The TX auto-
matic switchover has to be enabled for display and activation. If TX
Offset Delay and Static Delay are active at the same time, their
effects are added together.
Dispatch Time Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout center 0 s to 1 s Read only -
until its actual transmission at the antenna. This delay corresponds
to Maximum Delay (compulsory for all transmitters in an SFN) plus
Static Delay Offset plus TX Time Offset (if available).
4.5.6 ATV
To operate the transmitter in ATV mode, an appropriate software option must be acti-
vated using an option key.
The basic configuration for analog TV transmission is set up in the Coder Config menu.
Parameters such as the analog substandard as well as the transmission of sound with
or without NICAM modulation are selected here. The settings and display values
shown in the various submenus of the exciter depend on the configuration selected
here.
Regulation (Con- Switches white amplitude regulation on/off. With regulation switched Off, On Maintenance Yes
trol) off, the gain value set under Manual Gain is always used. With regu-
lation switched on, the gain is regulated to the level of the test line
set under Gain Source. If this test line is not found in the input signal,
either the Manual Gain value or the Stored Gain value is used
(depending on the setting under Fallback Gain Source).
The setting can be changed here.
White Pulse Mon- Shows the white pulse status signaled by the white pulse monitoring: None, OK, < – Read only -
itoring (Control) ● NONE 40 %, < –
The test line with the white pulse has not been found. 30 %, >
● OK +30 %, >
The white pulse has been found and the level is OK. +40 %
● The white pulse level is below/above the warning or fault thresh-
old.
The warning threshold is at ±30 %; the fault threshold is at
±40 %.
Fallback Gain Used to select whether the manually set gain value (Manual) or the Manual, Mem- Maintenance Yes
Source (Control) gain value last active (Memory) is to be used if the test line fails. ory
Current Gain Shows the current source for video gain: Manual, Mem- Read only -
Source (Control) ● Manual ory, Automatic
Manual setting. The setting value is the gain of the control ele- Control
ment as a percentage, referenced to gain 1.
● Memory
Saved setting. The gain uses the most recently saved value for
white control.
● Automatic Control
The gain is controlled by the white control.
White Amplitude Shows the measured value for white‑pulse input amplitude. 0 V to 1.3 V Read only -
Input (Control)
White Amplitude Shows the measured value for white‑pulse output amplitude. 0 V to 1.1 V Read only -
Output (Control)
Testline (Gain Shows the selected test line for the white pulse. 16 to 22 Maintenance Yes
Source) The setting can be changed here.
Field Indicates whether the first or second field has been selected for the First, Second Maintenance Yes
white pulse.
The setting can be changed here.
Manual Gain Shows the manually set value for video gain. The setting value is the ‒10.0 % to Maintenance Yes
(Gain Source) gain of the control element as a percentage, referenced to gain "1". 10.0 %
The setting can be changed here.
Stored Gain Shows the gain set by the white‑pulse control, referenced to gain "1". ‒50 % to Read only -
(Gain Source) If the selected test line fails, this gain value becomes active if "Mem- 50 %
ory" has been selected as the fallback gain source.
Limiter (White Indicates whether the white limiter is switched on or off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
Limiter) The setting can be changed here.
Threshold (White Shows the set threshold value for the white limiter. 90 % to Maintenance Yes
Limiter) 120 %
The setting can be changed here.
Status (White Indicates whether the white limiter has triggered. Not Limited, Read only -
Limiter) Limited
"Equalizer" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Video Coder >
Equalizer
Pre-Equalization Indicates whether receiver pre‑equalization is switched on. Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Receiver Pre- Receiver pre‑equalization can be switched on or off here.
Equalization)
"Config" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Video Coder >
Config
Coder Mode (FM Shows the set audio mode. Off, Mono, Maintenance Yes
Audio) Stereo, Dual,
The following settings have a special meaning:
● Off Auto (Data-
Dual‑sound is set as the audio mode. line)
● Mono
The AF1 input signal is placed on sound subcarrier 1.
● Stereo
The two AF input signals contain the left and right channel of a
stereo signal.
● Dual
The two AF input signals provide independent audio information
for dual‑sound mode.
● Auto (Dataline)
The audio mode is read out from the audio data line present in
the picture signal.
The setting can be changed here.
Dataline Info (FM Shows the audio mode signaling present in the audio data line. (N/A N/A, Mono, Read only -
Audio) means that there is no signaling in the selected audio data line.) Stereo, Dual
Current Audio Shows the current audio mode. Mono, Stereo, Read only -
Mode (FM Audio) Dual
Dataline (FM Shows the current audio data line. 10 to 22 Maintenance Yes
Audio) The setting can be changed here.
Pilot Gain (FM Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off". ‒19.0 dB to ‒ Maintenance Yes
Audio) 12.0 dB
Shows the selected level for the pilot signal.
The setting can be changed here.
Pre-Emphasis Indicates whether pre-emphasis for FM sound is switched on (50 μs Off, On Maintenance Yes
(FM Filter) or 75 μs).
Pre-emphasis can be switched on and off here.
Lowpass (FM Fil- Indicates whether a lowpass filter for FM sound is switched on. Off, On Maintenance Yes
ter) The lowpass filter can be switched on and off here.
Deviation Limiter Indicates whether the deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier is Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Deviation Lim- switched on.
iter) The deviation limiter can be switched on and off here.
Warning Above Shows the set threshold at which the deviation limiter warning is acti- ±50000 Hz to Maintenance Yes
(Deviation Lim- vated. In most cases, it is recommended to set Limiter Threshold and ±250000 Hz
iter) Warning Above to the same value.
The setting can be changed here.
Threshold (Devi- Shows the set threshold at which the deviation limiter is triggered. ±50000 Hz to Maintenance Yes
ation Limiter) The setting can be changed here. ±120000 Hz
"Carrier1" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Video Coder >
Carrier1
Current Deviation Shows the value of the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1. 0 Hz to Read only -
(Sound Carrier 1) 25000 Hz
Nominal Devia- Shows the preset value for the FM deviation of sound subcarrier 1. ±20000 Hz to Maintenance Yes
tion (Sound Car- The setting can be changed here. ±75000 Hz
rier 1)
Limiter (Sound Indicates whether the deviation limiter for sound subcarrier 1 has Not Limited, Read only -
Carrier 1) triggered. Limited
"Carrier2" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Video Coder >
Carrier2
Only displayed if "Sound Carrier" is set to "Dual Carrier".
Nominal Devia- Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off". ±20000 Hz to Maintenance Yes
tion (Sound Car- Shows the preset value for the FM deviation of sound subcarrier 2. ±75000 Hz
rier 2)
The setting can be changed here.
Limiter (Sound Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off". Not Limited, Read only -
Carrier 2) Limited
Indicates whether the deviation limiter for sound subcarrier 2 has
triggered.
Nicam Audio Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is Equal FM, Maintenance Yes
Mode (Nicam) set to "Coder". Mono Data,
Stereo, Dual
Shows the NICAM audio mode.
● Equal FM Audio Mode
The NICAM audio mode depends on the FM audio mode.
● Mono/Data, Stereo and Dual Sound
The NICAM audio mode is determined irrespective of the FM
channel. Coding is performed in accordance with the NICAM
specifications.
The setting can be changed here.
Preemphasis Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Nicam) set to "Coder".
Indicates whether the pre-emphasis required by the TV standard is
switched on or off for NICAM sound.
The setting can be changed here.
Reserve Sound Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On". Off, On Maintenance Yes
Flag (Nicam) Indicates whether or not the receiver is to use the sound from sound
subcarrier 1 if the NICAM signal fails.
The setting can be changed here.
"Reserve Sound Flag" should be set to "On" if audio carrier 1 trans-
mits the same sound signal (in mono) as the NICAM carrier. If differ-
ent information is transmitted on audio carrier 1 than on the NICAM
carrier, "Reserve Sound Flag" should be set to "Off".
Vision/Sound Shows the set value for sound subcarrier level 1, referenced to the ‒15.0 dB to ‒ Maintenance Yes
Carrier 1 (Gen- peak envelope power of the vision carrier. 5.0 dB
eral Settings) The setting can be changed here.
Vision/Sound Shows the set value for sound subcarrier level 2, referenced to the ‒27.0 dB to ‒ Maintenance Yes
Carrier 2 (Gen- peak envelope power of the vision carrier. 17.0 dB
eral Settings) The setting can be changed here.
Residual Carrier Shows the set value for the residual carrier. 8 % to 25 % Maintenance Yes
(General Set- The setting can be changed here.
tings)
Channel Band- Shows the used channel bandwidth. The channel bandwidth 6 MHz, Read only Yes
width depends on the set TV standard. 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Sound Carrier Shows the selected number of sound subcarriers (for standards B, Single Carrier, Maintenance Yes
(Audio) G, D/K, I, I1, K1). Dual Carrier
The following settings are possible here:
● Single Carrier = one sound subcarrier
● Dual Carrier = two sound subcarriers
Nicam (Audio) Indicates whether NICAM mode has been selected. Off, On Maintenance Yes
The setting can be changed here.
Nicam Mode Can only be set if "Nicam" is set to "On". Coder, Modu- Maintenance Yes
(Audio) lator
Shows the selected NICAM mode (for standards B, G, D/K, I, I1).
The following settings are possible here:
● Coder
AF signal feed of AF1 and AF2 via the inputs AUDIO 1 and
AUDIO 2 as well as coding and modulation in the transmitter.
● Modulation
Signal feed as NICAM 728 data stream via the NICAM DATA
digital input.
Input Impedance Shows the set value for the impedance of inputs AF 1 and AF 2. 600 Ω, High Maintenance Yes
(Audio) The setting can be changed here.
Nicam Roll-off Can only be set if "Nicam" is set to "On". Auto, 40 %, Maintenance Yes
(Audio) 100 %
Shows the setting selected for the NICAM rolloff (for standards B, G,
D/K, I, I1).
The following settings are possible here:
● Auto
NICAM rolloff is automatically set according to the selected TV
standard and in compliance with the NICAM specifications (rec-
ommended setting!).
● 40 %
Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff.
● 100 %
Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff.
Testmode (Sta- Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
tus) If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
Single Carrier Indicates whether an unmodulated single carrier has been activated. Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Video) The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and
therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the syn-
thesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out
connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be
removed and this switch must be set to "On". In order to protect the
amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter
is open.
The setting can be changed here.
Pilot (FM) Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off". Off, On Maintenance Yes
Indicates whether the pilot signal is switched on or off.
The setting can be changed here.
Sound Mode Shows the mode setting for FM sound subcarrier 1. On, Carrier Maintenance Yes
Carrier 1 (FM) Off, Modula-
The following settings are possible here:
● Carrier OFF tion Off
Switches off sound subcarrier 1.
● Modulation OFF
Switches on sound subcarrier 1 without modulation.
● ON
Switches on sound subcarrier 1 with modulation.
Sound Mode Shows the mode setting for FM sound subcarrier 2. On, Carrier Maintenance Yes
Carrier 2 (FM) Off, Modula-
The following settings are possible here:
● Carrier OFF tion Off
Switches off sound subcarrier 2.
● Modulation OFF
Switches on sound subcarrier 2 without modulation.
● ON
Switches on sound subcarrier 2 with modulation.
PRBS Insertion Indicates whether the PRBS for the NICAM carrier is activated or Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Nicam) deactivated.
The setting can be changed here.
Sound Mode Shows the mode setting for the NICAM sound subcarrier. Carrier Off, Maintenance
(Nicam) Modulation
The following settings are possible here:
● Carrier OFF Off, On
Switches off the sound subcarrier.
● Modulation OFF
Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation
● ON
Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each R&S TCE900/901 exciter with an
accuracy of ±1 Hz.
The output power of the R&S TCE900/901 exciter is regulated internally to +20 dBm
for ATV. It can be attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of
3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
R&S TCE900/901 exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The physical inputs for the analog TV transmission are configured in the "ATV Coder"
menu during system startup.
Nominal Input Shows the set video input amplitude. 0.7 Vpp or Maintenance Yes
Amplitude (Con- 1.0 Vpp (for
The setting can be changed here.
trol) 75 Ω)
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another, redundant exciter No (Create Maintenance Yes
Changeover (Con- is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for Warning),
trol) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). In the Yes (Create
"Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the higher‑level redun- Fault)
dancy control unit which decides whether to switch over to another
exciter or transmitter. In the "No" position, no switchover takes
place.
Clipping (Status) Shows the status of possible video input signal clipping. NO CLIP- Read only -
PING, NO
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible:
● NO CLIPPING (green) HEADROOM,
The video input signal is within the valid range. CLIPPING
● NO HEADROOM (yellow)
The video input signal is just off a clipping boundary.
● CLIPPING (red)
The video input signal is clipped.
Sync. Monitoring Shows the status of sync‑pulse monitoring of the input signal. OK, no V, no Read only -
(Status) H+V, Low
The following displays are possible:
● OK Level
A standard‑compliant input signal is being applied.
● No V
No V‑pulse frame is detected.
● No H+V
No V‑pulse or H‑pulse frame is detected.
● Low Level
The sync-pulse amplitude is less than 50 % of the nominal
sync-pulse amplitude; the processed signal is, however, availa-
ble at the encoder output.
White Amplitude Shows the measured value for white input amplitude. 0 V to 1.3 V Read only -
Input (Status) If the selected scanning line is not found in the input signal, the mea-
surement value 0 mV is displayed.
Sync. Amplitude Shows the measured input amplitude of the sync pulse. 0 V to 0.6 V Read only -
Input (Status)
The NICAM function is only active if the corresponding software option is installed.
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Input AF1
Nominal Input Shows the set input level at the FM sound modulator for AF signal ‒12 dBμ to Maintenance Yes
Level (FM Input) AF1. 12 dBμ
The setting can be changed here.
Current Input Shows the current input level at the FM sound modulator for AF sig- 0 % to 100 % Read only -
Level (FM Input) nal AF1 (as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
Clipping (FM Shows the status of possible clipping of AF input signal AF1. NO CLIP- Read only -
Input) PING, CLIP-
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible:
● NO CLIPPING (green) PING
AF input signal AF1 is within the valid range.
● CLIPPING (red)
AF input signal AF1 is clipped because it has exceeded the
maximum permissible input level.
Gain Adjustment Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is ‒6 dB to 6 dB Maintenance Yes
(Nicam Input) set to "Coder".
Shows the gain of the AF signal for the input of the Nicam coder.
The displayed value is relative to "Nominal Input Level".
The setting can be changed here for matching purposes.
Current Input Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is 0 % to 100 % Read only -
Level (Nicam set to "Coder".
Input) Shows the current input level at the NICAM coder for AF signal AF1
(as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
Clipping (Nicam Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is NO CLIP- Read only -
Input) set to "Coder". PING, CLIP-
PING
Shows the status of possible clipping of NICAM input signal AF1.
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible:
● NO CLIPPING (green)
NICAM input signal AF1 is within the valid range.
● CLIPPING (red)
NICAM input signal AF1 is clipped because it has exceeded the
maximum permissible input level.
Nominal Input Shows the set input level at the FM sound modulator for AF signal ‒12 dBμ to Maintenance Yes
Level (FM Input) AF2. 12 dBμ
The setting can be changed here.
Current Input Shows the current input level at the FM sound modulator for AF sig- 0 % to 100 % Read only -
Level (FM Input) nal AF2 (as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
Clipping (FM Shows the status of possible clipping of AF input signal AF2. NO CLIP- Read only -
Input) PING, CLIP-
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible:
● NO CLIPPING (green) PING
AF input signal AF2 is within the valid range.
● CLIPPING (red)
AF input signal AF2 is clipped because it has exceeded the max-
imum permissible input level.
Gain Adjustment Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is ‒6 dB to 6 dB Maintenance Yes
(Nicam Input) set to "Coder".
Shows the set input level for the NICAM signal that is fed to the inte-
grated NICAM coder.
The setting can be changed here for matching purposes.
Current Input Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is 0 % to 100 % Read only -
Level (Nicam set to "Coder".
Input) Shows the current input level at the NICAM coder for AF signal AF2
(as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
Clipping (Nicam Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is NO CLIP- Read only -
Input) set to "Coder". PING, CLIP-
PING
Shows the status of possible clipping of NICAM input signal AF2.
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible:
● NO CLIPPING (green)
NICAM input signal AF2 is within the valid range.
● CLIPPING (red)
NICAM input signal AF2 is clipped because it has exceeded the
maximum permissible input level.
Nicam 728 Data- Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is OK, Not Read only -
stream (Nicam set to "Modulator". Found
Input) Indicates whether a NICAM 728 data stream is present.
4.5.7 DAB
To operate the transmitter in DAB mode, an appropriate software option must be acti-
vated using an option key.
"Config" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DAB Coder > Config
Source (DAB Shows the DAB mode source. Manual, ETI Maintenance Yes
Mode) (LI)-MID
The setting can be changed here.
● Manual
DAB mode is set manually at the transmitter.
● ETI (LI)-MID
DAB mode is read out from the ETI header.
Source Active Indicates the source from which the DAB mode setting is retrieved. Manual, ETI Read only -
(DAB Mode)
Mode (DAB Indicates which DAB mode has been manually preselected. I, II, III, IV Maintenance Yes
Mode) The setting can be changed here.
Mode ETI(LI)-MId Indicates which DAB mode is signaled via the ETI header in the data I, II, III, IV Read only -
(DAB Mode) stream.
Mode Active (DAB Indicates the currently active DAB mode. I, II, III, IV Read only -
Mode)
Overall Signal Shows the transit time of the signal through the transmitter. 0 to 2 sec Read only -
Delay (DAB
Mode)
TX Address (ASS Shows the transmitter address transmitted in the ASS (Asynchro- 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
Type 0) nous Signaling).
Using the transmitter address, it is possible to activate settings from
the TII via the DAB multiplexer individually for each transmitter.
The setting can be changed here.
Required (ASS Depending on the setting for TII Source, indicates whether the TX Yes, No Read only -
Type 0) address is evaluated.
Present (ASS Indicates whether transmitter identification information (TII) for the Yes, No Read only -
Type 0) set transmitter address is contained in the transport stream.
State (ASS Type Indicates whether the TX address is present. Never Seen, Read only -
0) ● Never Seen Holdover, OK
No TX address has been found in the data stream. The main ID
is set to 0 and the sub‑ID is set to 1. No additional TX time off-
set is set.
● Holdover
The data stream does not currently contain a TX address. The
TII last found is sent.
● OK
TII for the set TX address is present in the data stream.
TII Source (TII) Indicates the source from which the identifiers of the TII (transmis- Off, Manual, Maintenance Yes
sion identification information) settings are to be retrieved. MNSC
The setting can be changed here.
● Off
No TII settings are to be used.
● Manual
The main ID and sub‑ID are to be set manually.
● MNSC
The main ID and sub‑ID are to be retrieved from the MNSC
(multiplex network service channel) data.
Source Active (TII) Indicates which source has been selected for the identifiers of the Off, Manual, Read only -
TII (transmission identification information) settings. MNSC
MAIN ID MNSC Shows the main ID signaled via MNSC (multiplex network service 0 to 69 Read only -
(TII) channel).
Main ID Active Shows the main ID effective in the exciter. 0 to 69 Read only -
(TII)
Main ID State (TII) Indicates whether the main ID set in the exciter is valid. Off, Out of Read only -
Range, OK
Sub ID MNSC Shows the sub‑ID signaled via MNSC (multiplex network service 0 to 31 Read only -
(TII) channel).
Sub ID Active (TII) Indicates the sub-ID effective in the exciter. 0 to 31 Read only -
Carrier Phase Defines the TII carrier phase (CP). ETSI, PR Maintenance Yes
● ETSI EN300401 Symbol
The phase of the TII carrier pairs is identical (in line with ETSI
EN 300 401).
● PR Symbol
The phase of the TII carrier pairs is not identical (in line with
ETSI EN 300 401).
"Test" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DAB Coder > Test
Generate Test Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off, PRBS, Maintenance No
Signal (Test Sig- ● Off Single Carrier
nal Generator) Switches off test signal generation.
● R&S Ensemble
Generates an ETI(LI) signal instead of the payload.
● Test Carrier
Generates an unmodulated single carrier.
The frequency of the single carrier is in the band center.
This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the
synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF
Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out
(X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this
test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
The setting can be changed here.
Testmode (Test Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. Off, On Read only -
Signal Generator) If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the
transmitter will not be possible.
Data Channel Indicates whether a PRBS sequence is to be inserted into the data Off, PRBS Maintenance No
(R&S Ensemble) channel.
To activate this function, the parameter "Generate Test Signal" must
be set to "R&S Ensemble".
● Off
A PRBS sequence is only inserted into the audio channel.
● PRBS
A PRBS sequence is inserted into the audio and data channel.
The setting can be changed here.
PRBS Mode (R&S Indicates which pseudo random binary sequence is to be inserted x^20+x^17+1, Maintenance No
Ensemble) into the audio channel and the data channel. x^23+x^18+1,
x^15+x^14+1
To activate this function, the parameter "Generate Test Signal" must
be set to "R&S Ensemble".
The setting can be changed here.
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
For the DAB and T‑DMB transmission standards, the channel center frequency must
be set during this process.
The output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be attenu-
ated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
ETI feed
Every R&S TCE900/901 exciter which is suitable for the transmission of DAB has two
transport stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). For the inputs, the input impedance
can be set between 75 Ω and high impedance. The data rate is also displayed.
EDI feed
As an alternative to feed via TS, the signal can be fed via IP.
To be able to use the EDI feed function, software option K57 "EDI Input" must have
been installed beforehand.
IP feed
Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-
able in the exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned
an IP address in the Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Task View > Con-
figure TS LAN menu. The two Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams
which contain additional configuration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast
and multicast streams. For multicast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which
makes the stream available in the network must also be specified. It is possible to
assign both logical IP streams to the same physical socket, but to specify different mul-
ticast addresses. This provides maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy
scenarios in the feed path.
The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the "Configure TS LAN"
task and only become effective after the exciter has been rebooted.
Stream Status Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed via the ETI1/2 IN OK, Stream Read only -
sockets (X20/X21). Fail
Sync Status Indicates whether synchronization with the data stream was possible LOS, AIS, G. Read only -
and which feed type is used for the data stream. 703, G.704,
ETI(NI),
ETI(NA)-5592
,
ETI(NA)-5376
Error Level Status Shows the status of the error level contained in the ETI and is set for Off, No Sig- Read only -
each individual ETI frame by the multiplexer. nal, Too High,
● Off: Monitoring is deactivated. OK
● No Signal: There is no signal at the input.
● Too High: The error level is ≥ 2. This input is no longer used.
● OK: The error level is ≤ 2.
Datarate Shows the total data rate on the ETI feed. 0 to Read only -
2048000 pps
Datarate Status Indicates whether the fed data rate deviates from the expected data Too Low, Too Read only -
rate window. High, No Sig-
nal, OK
Input Impedance Shows the selected input impedance at the ETI1/2 IN connectors 75 Ω, High Read only -
(X20/X21).
TIST Status Shows more detailed information on the state of the fed timestamp Off, Missing Read only -
(TIST). NI, Missing
● Off: No TIST is evaluated in MFN mode. NA, Null, Fly-
● Missing NI/NA: No valid TIST has been found in the transport wheel Active,
stream. OK
● Null: The TIST has been set to 0. The transmitter cannot be
synchronized in the SFN.
● Flywheel Active: The TIST has been set to 0. The transmitter
uses the last valid TIST to keep the time of transmission con-
stant and continue transmitting.
● OK: A valid TIST has been detected.
Multiplex Name Shows the name of the multiplex in the transport stream. <20 charac- Maintenance Yes
ters>
A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be
entered here.
"Settings" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Input 1/2 > Settings
Mute on Input Fail Used to define the operating behavior when the active input fails. No, Yes Maintenance Yes
(Input Control) This parameter is available in MFN mode only.
● No – In this mode, the output signal is not suppressed if the
active input fails. Null packets are output instead.
● Yes – If the active input fails, the output signal is suppressed.
Force Exciter Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter Yes, No Maintenance Yes
Changeover (On is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for
Input Fail) all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1).
● Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the
higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to
switch over to another exciter or transmitter.
● No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Fail Delay Used to set a delay time which must elapse following an input signal 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(On Input Fail) failure before the output signal is suppressed and a sum fault is gen-
erated.
Logical Input 1/2 Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independ- ETI 1, ETI 2 Maintenance Yes
(Input Definition) ently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is
possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The
selection options for the data sources are determined by the instal-
led input interfaces and option keys.
Multiplex 1/2 A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be Maintenance Yes
Name (Input Defi- entered here.
nition)
ETI 1/2 (Source Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
Signals) via the TS feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the No Stream
ETI Feed menu must be checked.
EDI 1/2 (Source Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the transmitter Stream OK, Read only -
Signals) via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated here, the settings in the No Stream
EDI Feed menu must be checked.
Monitor Out For measuring purposes, either an input signal or a test signal can Off, Active Maintenance No
be switched to the TS Monitor Out socket (X22). Input, Logical
Input 1, Logi-
Framecounter Time Zero Pulse generates a measurement pulse
cal Input 2,
every 6 seconds.
ETI Genera-
tor, FCT Zero
Pulse (6s)
Input Impedance Shows the selected input impedance at the ETI1/2 IN connectors 75 Ω, High Maintenance No
(Common) (X20/X21).
The setting can be changed here.
Sync Status 1/2 Indicates whether synchronization with the data stream was possible LOS, AIS, G. Read only -
(ETI) and which feed type is used for the data stream. 703, G.704,
ETI(NI),
ETI(NA)-5592
,
ETI(NA)-5376
Datarate 1/2 (ETI) Shows the total data rate on the ETI feed. 0 to Read only -
2048000 pps
Datarate Status Indicates whether the fed data rate deviates from the expected data Too Low, Too Read only -
1/2 (ETI) rate window. High, No Sig-
nal, OK
Input Dejitter Buf- The setting can be changed here. 10 to 100 Maintenance No
fer (Common)
Max Replacement Indicates how often, in the event of input signal interruption, the pre- 0 to 255 Maintenance No
(Common) vious packet is allowed to be resent in order to bridge the resulting
gap.
The setting can be changed here.
RJ45 Connector Used to define the physical network interface to which the logical IP TS Maintenance No
(Encapsulation) stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to LAN1(X30),
IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This TS
allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected LAN2(X31)
automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However,
it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same
physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal
switchover function can toggle automatically between two data
streams.
IP Address Shows the IP address of the generator in Multicast mode. In Unicast Maintenance (Yes)
(Encapsulation) mode, the IP address of the selected RJ‑45 socket of the exciter is (read only)
displayed here. In Multicast mode, the IP address can be changed
here.
Datarate 1/2 (ETI) Shows the total data rate on the EDI feed. 0 to Read only -
2048000 pps
Streaming Mode Used to set the used type of network streaming. Multicast, Maintenance Yes
(Encapsulation) ● Unicast: The multiplexer sends the appropriate IP stream to the Unicast
IP address of the TV transmitter.
● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a multicast IP
stream that the multiplexer makes available in the feed network
to several transmitters simultaneously.
Port (Settings) Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is 0 to 65535 Maintenance Yes
expected.
Stream Status Indicates whether the fed data rate deviates from the expected data Too Low, Too Read only -
rate window. High, No Sig-
nal, OK
Sync Status 1/2 Indicates whether synchronization with the data stream was possible LOS, AIS, G. Read only -
(ETI) and which feed type is used for the data stream. 703, G.704,
ETI(NI),
ETI(NA)-5592
,
ETI(NA)-5376
ations are delayed for the set delay times. If the signal fails at both the main input and
the standby input, the priority input remains active.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching
The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits
seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the
"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes
place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available
without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in
MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal
feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which
arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the
two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals
can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
The active input can be switched over in the Home > Transmitter > Exciter menu
by pressing the input selected switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired
input "Input".
● Switchover with automatic input signal switchover ON
The preselected input can be switched over in the Home > Transmitter > Exciter
menu by pressing the input selected switch ("Selector") and then selecting the
desired input "Input".
● Manual switchover after automatic switchover by automatic input signal switchover
function
The active input can be switched back to the preselected input in the Home >
Transmitter > Exciter menu by pressing the input selected switch ("Selector") and
then selecting the desired input "Input".
Automatic (Config- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
uration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Automatic (Config- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Read only -
uration) ● Off: Changed
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● Active:
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only dis-
played if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, None
If "None" is set, both inputs have equal priority. This minimizes the
number of switching operations.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is active and possible. In this case, the switch-
over always takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seam-
lessly).
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 600 s Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If seamless switching is possible,
switchover always takes place immediately without interruption
regardless of the set guard time.
If "to Reserve Only" has been selected as the "Direction", the set
guard time has no effect.
If "Seamless Switching" is set to "On", the lowest possible guard
time setting is automatically limited to 15 seconds in order to prevent
the two switchover strategies from influencing each other.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Not Possible, Read only -
Switching) Possible
"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different
data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set
"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals
with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes
place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard
Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Delay between Shows the delay time between logical input 1 and logical input 2 in 0 ms to Read only -
Inputs (Seamless ms. A positive value means that the signal at input 2 arrives later at 1000 ms
Switching) the exciter.
If Reserve Fails Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
(Reserve Control) monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Input (Selector) Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is ON, the preselected input is switched over.
For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the exciter has a function that allows
the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the SFN, time synchroni-
zation of all exciters in the network is performed using a pulse per second (PPS),
which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.
First of all an additional delay, the network compensation delay, is applied to the ETI
signal in the network adapter at the transmitter input. The network compensation delay
compensates for the differences in transit time to the transmitters (network path delay)
within the single-frequency network.
Processing in the channel encoder (COFDM) begins at the same time for all DAB
transmitters. However, depending on the transmitter manufacturer and in some cases
the configuration, the transit time (Processing Time) of the channel encoder (COFDM)
can vary. In order to keep the transit time constant through all transmitters, a further
delay, the transmitter compensation delay, must be added.
To influence transit times from the transmitter to the DAB receiver, there is also the
option to add an individual delay to each transmitter. This enables transmitters to be
virtually offset within the SFN. This can be necessary in order to compensate for trans-
horizon effects due to transmitters in special positions. If, for example, transmitter A is
on a mountain, the transit time to the transmission area of transmitter B can be very
long, without the signal being significantly attenuated. The receiver can only compen-
sate for the different signal transit times up to the length of the guard interval (depend-
ing on the DAB mode). The transit time can be compensated for as necessary by the
addition of a further offset delay to transmitter B.
Settings
To operate the transmitter with an integrated GPS receiver as a signal source for syn-
chronization of the time of transmission, an appropriate software option must be activa-
ted using an option key.
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > SFN Regulation > Time Syn-
chronization
Ext. PPS (Time Indicates whether a pulse per second is present at the 1PPS_IN No Signal, Read only -
Reference) socket (X23) of the exciter. Inaccurate,
OK
Source (Time Shows the set signal source for synchronization of the time of trans- External PPS, Maintenance Yes
Reference) mission. Internal GPS
The setting can be changed here.
Int. GPS PPS Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is returning a stable No Signal, Read only -
(Time Reference) pulse per second (PPS). This function must have been enabled Inaccurate,
beforehand by installing an option key. OK
SFN Sync Indicates whether the MFN or SFN network mode (dynamic or static) Off (MFN), Maintenance Yes
is set. Dynamic
(SFN), Static
The setting can be changed here.
● Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not controlled. (SFN)
● Dynamic (SFN): The time of transmission of a symbol is the
same for all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network
(SFN). A network compensation delay is calculated automati-
cally. A GPS receiver is required for synchronization.
● Static (SFN): The time of transmission of a symbol is the same
for all the transmitters of a single‑frequency network (SFN). For
this purpose, the network compensation delay must be man-
ually determined and preset for each transmitter. Correct opera-
tion is only possible if it is ensured that the transit time on the
feed path remains constant.
PPS State Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized OK, Holdover, Read only -
with the frequency control. Holdover
● OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency control. expired, Miss-
● Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of the fre- ing
quency control have failed. Time synchronization is now per-
formed with the accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator
(OCXO).
● Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which the transmitter
is permitted to remain in holdover mode has expired (see the
Frequency Control menu).
● Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since the exciter
was last started.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control
must be checked.
SFN TIST Source Indicates which source is set for the TIST (timestamp). ETI (LI), ETI Maintenance Yes
(NA)
The setting can be changed here if "SFN sync" has been set to
"Dynamic (SFN)".
Either the TIST from the ETI (LI) frame or from the ETI (NA) frame
can be used.
Maximum TIST Indicates the degree of accuracy to which the timestamp (TIST) will Level 1 to Maintenance Yes
Level be evaluated. You should always select the highest possible level Level 5
supported by the ensemble multiplexer and all other transmitters in
the network. Level 4 corresponds to 488 ns.
The level can be adjusted here if "SFN Sync" has been set to
"Dynamic (SFN)".
Input 1/2 (Net- Shows the network compensation delay for operation in static SFN 0 s to 1 s Maintenance Yes
work Compensa- networks.
tion Delay (Static If "SFN-Sync" is set to "Static (SFN)", the different feed times of mul-
SFN)) tiple transmitters in a single‑frequency network can be compensated
for here by setting a static transit time correction. The value can be
set separately for both logical inputs.
Max. Deviation Shows the maximum permitted deviation of the time of transmission 0µs to 100 μs Read only -
(Time of Dis- relative to the internally controlled reference frequency.
patch) If the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmission is
recalculated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute).
SFN State (Time Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a SFN Resync, Read only -
of Dispatch) time‑synchronous manner. No Time
Information,
If the "No Time Reference" error message is displayed, the refer-
No Time Ref-
ence feed of the time synchronization and the frequency control
erence, SFN
must be checked. If the "No Time Information" error message is dis-
Resync, In
played, you must check whether the control information for the time
Time
of transmission is contained in the data stream (see the "Input"
menu).
Network Compen- Shows the network compensation delay for ETI 1/2. 0 s to 1 s Read only -
sation The display varies depending on the selected network operating
mode.
● Dynamic SFN: Shows the automatically determined delay
based on the timestamp (TIST).
● Static SFN: Shows the set delay for ETI 1/2.
TX Processing Shows the minimum transit time of the signal through the transmit- 0 s to 1 s Read only -
Delay ter.
The minimum transit time is determined by the signal processing in
the channel encoder (COFDM) and depends on the DAB mode.
TX Compensation Shows the time by which signal processing is artificially delayed in 0 s to 1 s Read only -
Delay order to achieve a constant TX delay.
TX Delay Shows the transit time of the signal through the transmitter. 0 s to 1 s Read only -
This transit time is the sum of TX Compensation Delay plus Pro-
cessing Delay.
Static Delay Offset Shows the positive or negative offset (set for the individual transmit- ‒10 s to Maintenance Yes
ter site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of +10 s
transmission preset under TX Delay.
The setting can be changed here: The Static Delay Offset can be
used to manually optimize SFN coverage if necessary.
Total Delay Shows the total delay as the sum of Network Compensation Delay 0 s to 1 s Read only -
plus TX Delay plus Static Delay Offset plus TX Offset Delay.
4.5.8 FM
Pilot (Pilot & Pre- Indicates whether the pilot tone is switched on or off. Off, On Read only -
emphasis)
Pilot Deviation Shows the set pilot tone deviation. 2 kHz to Read only -
(Pilot & Preem- 10 kHz
phasis)
Preemphasis Indicates whether the preemphasis is switched on or off. Off, On Read only -
(Pilot & Preem-
phasis)
Preemphasis Shows the set time constant for preemphasis. 50 μs, 75 µs Read only -
(Pilot & Preem-
phasis)
Nominal Dev. Shows the set nominal frequency deviation. 40.0 kHz to Read only -
(Deviation) 150 kHz
Actual Dev. (Devi- Shows the measured total frequency deviation. 0 kHz to Read only -
ation) 150 kHz
Limiter Mode Indicates whether the deviation limiter is switched on or off. Off, On Read only -
(Limiter)
Threshold (Lim- Shows the set threshold of the deviation limiter. 40.0 kHz to Read only -
iter) 150.0 kHz
Limiter Activity Shows the activity of the deviation limiter between the output and 0 % to 100 % Read only -
(Limiter) input (within 1 s).
Clip. Deviation Shows the activity of the MPX clipper between the input and output. 0 kHz to Read only -
(Limiter) 100.0 kHz
Power Control Indicates whether the MPX power control is switched on or off. Off, On Read only -
(MPX Power)
Threshold (MPX Shows the set control threshold of the MPX power control. ‒5.0 dBr to Read only -
Power) +5.0 dBr
Actual Power Shows the measured MPX power. ‒10.0 dBr to Read only -
(MPX Power) +10.0 dBr
Pilot Off/Pilot On Indicates whether the pilot tone is switched on or off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
(Pilot & Preem- The setting can be changed here if the Stereo mode has been
phasis) selected.
Pilot Deviation Shows the set nominal pilot tone deviation. 2 kHz to Maintenance Yes
(Pilot & Preem- 10 kHz
The setting can be changed here if the Stereo mode has been
phasis) selected.
Preem. Off/ Indicates whether the preemphasis is switched on or off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
Preem. On (Pilot The setting can be changed here if the Stereo mode has been
& Preemphasis) selected.
50 μs/75 µs (Pilot Shows the set time constant for preemphasis. 50 μs, 75 µs Maintenance Yes
& Preemphasis) ● 50 μs is predominantly used in Europe and Asia.
● 75 μs is predominantly used in the Americas.
The setting can be changed here if preemphasis is switched on.
Nominal Dev. Shows the set nominal frequency deviation. 40.0 kHz to Maintenance Yes
(Deviation) 150.0 kHz
The setting can be changed here.
Actual Dev. (Devi- Shows the measured total frequency deviation. 0 kHz to Read only -
ation) 150.0 kHz
Limiter Mode Indicates whether the deviation limiter is switched on or off. Off, On, Clip. Maintenance Yes
(Limiter) ● OFF: The limiter is not active. Only
● ON: The limiter is active. The set threshold for the deviation lim-
iter is being used.
● CLIP. ONLY: Only the MPX clipper is active.
The setting can be changed here.
Threshold (Lim- Shows the set threshold of the deviation limiter. 40.0 kHz to Maintenance Yes
iter) 150 kHz
The setting can be changed here.
Limiter Activity Shows the activity of the deviation limiter between the output and 0 % to 100 % Read only -
(Limiter) input (within 1 s).
Clip. Deviation Shows the activity of the MPX clipper between the output and input. 0 kHz to Read only -
(Limiter) 100.0 kHz
PwrCtrl Off/ Indicates whether the MPX power control is switched on or off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
PwrCtrl On (MPX The setting can be changed here.
Power)
Threshold (MPX Shows the set control threshold of the MPX power control. ‒5.0 dBr to Maintenance Yes
Power) +5.0 dBr
The setting can be changed here.
Actual Power Shows the measured MPX power. ‒10.0 dBr to Read only -
(MPX Power) +10.0 dBr
The transmit frequency is set separately for each exciter with an accuracy of ±1 Hz.
With FM, the output power of the exciters is regulated internally to +20 dBm. It can be
attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).
Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the
exciter has to be configured as described below. In addition, the appropriate input level
for the amplifiers is implemented using different attenuation in the RF splitters.
To configure the transmit frequency and output power, proceed as follows:
The exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software
options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal
feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to
logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available
physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two
selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings relevant
for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs
are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
Logical Input 1 Shows the input interface set for Input 1. AF, AES/ Maintenance Yes
(Input Definition) EBU, MPX1,
The setting can be changed here.
MPX2
The input interfaces used can be configured independently of each
other for Input 1 and Input 2.
Input 1 Mode Shows the mono or stereo mode set for Input 1. Stereo, Mono Maintenance Yes
(Input Definition) Left, Mono
The setting can be changed here. It is only effective for AF and AES
Right, Mono
input signals.
(L+R)/2
Logical Input 2 Shows the input interface set for Input 2. None, AF, Maintenance Yes
(Input Definition) AES/EBU,
The setting can be changed here.
MPX1, MPX2
The input interfaces used can be configured independently of each
other for Input 1 and Input 2.
Input 2 Mode Shows the mono or stereo mode set for Input 2. Stereo, Mono Maintenance Yes
(Input Definition) Left, Mono
The setting can be changed here. It is only effective for AF and AES
Right, Mono
input signals.
(L+R)/2
Inp. Impedance Shows the set value of the input impedance of both analog inputs 600 Ω, > 2 kΩ Maintenance Yes
(AF Settings) (L/R).
The setting can be changed here.
Nominal Level Shows the set value of the nominal input level of both analog inputs -6 dBu to +12 Maintenance Yes
(AF Settings) (Left/Right) for achieving the nominal deviation. dBu
The setting can be changed here.
Threshold (AF Shows the set value for the input fault threshold of both analog 0 % to 100 % Maintenance Yes
Settings) inputs (Left/Right).
The setting can be changed here.
Nominal Level Shows the set value of the nominal input level at the AES/EBU input ‒1 dBu to Maintenance Yes
(AES/EBU Input for achieving the nominal deviation. +16 dBu
Levels) The setting can be changed here.
Threshold Shows the set value for the input fault threshold at the AES/EBU 0 % to 100 % Maintenance Yes
(AES/EBU Input input.
Levels) The setting can be changed here.
Nominal Level Shows the set value of the nominal input level of input MPX 1 for ‒1 dBu to Maintenance Yes
(MPX 1 Input achieving the nominal deviation. +16 dBu
Config) The setting can be changed here.
Threshold (MPX 1 Shows the set values for the input fault threshold at input MPX 1. 0 % to 100 % Maintenance Yes
Input Config) The setting can be changed here.
Nominal Level Shows the set value of the nominal input level of input MPX 2 for ‒1 dBu to Maintenance Yes
(MPX 2 Input achieving the nominal deviation. +16 dBu
Config) The setting can be changed here.
Threshold (MPX 2 Shows the set values for the input fault threshold at input MPX 2. 0 % to 100 % Maintenance Yes
Input Config) The setting can be changed here.
Automatic (Config- Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, On Operation Yes
uration) ● Off:
The automatic switchover function is switched off.
● On:
Activates automatic switchover of the input signal to the
standby input if the preferred input fails.
The setting can be changed here.
Guard Time to Shows the set guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 10 s Maintenance Yes
Reserve switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
signal at the preferred input fails.
The setting can be changed here.
Guard Time Back Shows the set guard time which must elapse before the automatic 0 s to 10 s Maintenance Yes
switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails.
The setting can be changed here.
Switch to (Config- Shows the set operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve, Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Reserve &
● Reserve back
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● Reserve & back
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
If Reserve Input Indicates whether the signal at the standby input is to be monitored. Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
Fails (Reserve ● Do Not Show Warning Warning,
Control) This setting must be selected if the transmitter is operated with Show Warn-
only one input signal or the standby input is connected only ing
temporarily.
● Show Warning
This setting must be selected if two redundant input signals are
normally supplied to the transmitter.
The setting can be changed here.
The exciter has an automatic switchover function which, in the event of a signal failure
at one logical input, switches over to the other logical input (provided that a valid input
signal is available at the other logical input). Before a failure occurs, the preselected
input is active. The way in which this automatic switchover function operates is deter-
mined by the following factors:
input (and provided that "Switch to" is set to "Reserve & Back"). All switchover opera-
tions are delayed for the set delay times.
Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in
certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
If the switch is set to "Reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Input (TX Over- Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input Input 1, Input Operation Yes
view) signal switchover function is OFF. If the automatic switchover func- 2
tion is on, the input can only be switched over using this switch if
Preferred Input is set to "No Preference" or a switchover to the
standby input has taken place.
Preferred Input Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal Input 1, Input Operation Yes
(Configuration) switchover function should use whenever possible. 2, No Prefer-
ence
Automatic (State) Shows the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Undefined, Read only -
● Not Ready: Not Ready,
The automatic switchover function is not ready. An input signal Ready,
is not present at the standby input or a switchover has already Changed
taken place and the automatic switchover function is configured +Ready,
in such a way that automatic switchback is not permitted. Changed+Not
● Ready: Ready
The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the cur-
rently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon
as the input signal of the currently active input fails.
● Changed:
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the
preferred input to the standby input.
Automatic (Con- Used to activate automatic switchover of the input signal to the Off, On Operation Yes
figuration) standby input if the preferred input fails.
Guard Time to Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic Maintenance Yes
Reserve (Configu- switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input
ration) signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if
seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always
takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic Maintenance Yes
(Configuration) switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input
signal at the standby input fails. If seamless switching is possible,
switchover always takes place immediately without interruption
regardless of the set guard time. If "to Reserve Only" has been
selected as the "Direction", the set guard time has no effect.
Switch to (Config- Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover Reserve Maintenance Yes
uration) function. Only,
● "To Reserve Only": Reserve &
The automatic switchover function switches over once from the Back
preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not
ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the
preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.
● "To Reserve and Back":
Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-
matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if
the signal at the standby input fails.
Status (Seamless Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. Undefined, Read only -
Switching) Not Possible,
"Not Possible" always appears if only one input signal is supplied or
Possible
in cases where two different data streams are present at the two
inputs. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes place
immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard Time to
Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Seamless (Seam- Indicates whether seamless switching is active. The setting can be Off, On Maintenance Yes
less Switching) changed here. If active, the value for "Guard Time Back" is automat-
ically corrected to a minimum of 15 seconds in order to avoid inter-
ference between the two strategies for seamless and time‑controlled
switching.
Delay between Shows the delay time on the feed path between the two logical Read only -
Inputs (Seamless inputs. A positive value means that the signal arrives at input 2 on
Switching) the exciter later than the signal at input 1.
ID Reserve Fail Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be Do Not Show Maintenance Yes
monitored. Warning,
● If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the Show Warn-
standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show ing
Warning" must be selected.
● If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the
transmitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Dual drive
Transmitters in the "Dual Drive" configuration consist of at least two exciters and a sys-
tem control unit. The automatic exciter switchover function is distributed between both
exciters. The system control unit is responsible for controlling the cooling system as
well as for communication via remote interfaces.
Backup drive
Transmitters in the "Backup Drive" configuration consist of two exciters. The automatic
exciter switchover function is distributed between these two instruments. Communica-
tion via remote interfaces takes place via exciter A.
In the "Exciter Automatic" menu, it is possible to switch automatic switchover between
two exciters on and off and to select the basic operating behavior of the function. The
"Switch Mode" switch is used to select whether automatic switchover to a standby
exciter is to take place once only (Single Switch) or whether a switchback is also to be
performed if the standby exciter signals a fault, but the preselected exciter is no longer
faulty (Multiple Switch).
It is also possible to set a guard time which must always expire before a switchover
can take place. This prevents unwanted switchover operations resulting from brief fault
events.
4.6.2.1 Operation
One of the two exciters can be preselected for operation by pressing the exciter selec-
tor switch (or via the Exciter Auto -> Exciter Switch tab). This exciter is switched on
together with the output stage by pressing the "Program Path On" switch (in the
"Transmitter" menu). If necessary, the RF of the standby exciter can be switched on for
measuring and monitoring purposes by pressing the "Reserve Path (on)" switch (in the
"Transmitter" menu). A switchover operation causes the standby exciter to become the
main exciter and vice versa. The ON/OFF switches then act on the other exciter in
each case.
4.6.2.2 Settings
"Overview" parameters
● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter Auto > Automatic
Automatic (Auto- Switches the automatic exciter switchover function on and off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
matic Switch)
Guard Time Shows the set checkout time which must elapse before switchover 1 s to 60 s Maintenance Yes
(Automatic to another exciter can take place. This can be used to make sure
Switch) that brief faults do not immediately cause a switchover. The Guard
Time is also effective in the "Multiple Switch" switch mode for the
switchback to the preselected exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Switch Mode Determines the behavior after successfully switching over to a Single Switch, Maintenance Yes
(Automatic standby exciter. Single Switch: The selector of the automatic exciter Multiple
Switch) switchover remains fixed on the standby exciter until either the pre- Switch
selection of the exciter is pressed again or the "Reset Faults Trans-
mitter" button is pressed. Multiple Switch: The automatic switchover
automatically switches back to the preselected exciter as soon as
the standby exciter signals a fault and the preselected exciter is
operational again.
Automatic (Status) Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function is ready. Ready, Not Read only -
● Ready: The automatic switchover function is ready for opera- Ready
tion.
● Not Ready: The standby exciter is not ready for operation, the
transmitter is switched off, the automatic switchover function
has already switched over or there is a fault in the exciter
switch.
Active Exciter Indicates which exciter is currently active following switchover by the Exciter A, Read only -
(Status) automatic switchover function. Exciter B
Preselected Indicates which exciter has been preselected for operation. Exciter A, Maintenance Yes
Exciter Exciter B
The setting can be changed here.
If the "Switch Mode" of the automatic switchover function is set to
"Single Switch" and the exciter has switched over, the switchover
can be undone by selecting the preselected exciter again.
Active Exciter Indicates which exciter is currently active, i.e. is connected to the Exciter A, Read only -
antenna depending on the switching state of the automatic exciter Exciter B
switchover function.
Automatic Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function is ready. Ready, Not Read only -
● Ready: The automatic switchover function is ready for opera- Ready
tion.
● Not Ready: The standby exciter is not ready for operation, the
transmitter is switched off, the automatic switchover function
has already switched over or there is a fault in the exciter
switch.
Switch Indicates whether the exciter switch is working. OK, Fail Read only -
If a switchover to the standby exciter fails, a fault is indicated.
CAN Link Indicates whether data communication with the exciter switch is OK, Fail Read only -
functioning correctly.
Transmitters with active output stage standby are structured so that their amplifiers are
split into at least two racks with separate cooling systems. If one rack fails, the overall
output power of the transmitter only decreases by a maximum of 3 dB. The automatic
switchover function consists of two parts: the automatic exciter switchover function and
the automatic output stage switchover function.
The automatic exciter switchover function is comparable to the "dual drive" configura-
tion: an exciter can be preselected for operation. If it fails, the system switches back to
the standby exciter automatically.
The automatic output stage switchover function disconnects the amplifier rack from the
signal path completely if the rack fails. This reduces the transmitter's power drop to
approx. 3 dB.
For testing purposes, any exciter – together with only one output stage – can be
switched to a dummy antenna so that measurements can be taken at these standby
components. The automatic switchover function can remain active during this process.
Preselected Indicates which exciter has been preselected for operation. Exciter A, Maintenance Yes
Exciter Exciter B
The setting can be changed here.
If the "Switch Mode" of the automatic switchover function is set to
"Single Switch" and the exciter has switched over, the switchover
can be undone by selecting the preselected exciter again.
Active Exciter Indicates which exciter is currently active, i.e. is connected to the Exciter A, Read only -
antenna depending on the switching state of the automatic exciter Exciter B
switchover function.
Automatic Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function is ready. Ready, Not Read only -
● Ready: The automatic switchover function is ready for opera- Ready
tion.
● Not Ready: The standby exciter is not ready for operation, the
transmitter is switched off, the automatic switchover function
has already switched over or there is a fault in the exciter
switch.
Switch Indicates whether the exciter switch is working. OK, Fail Read only -
If a switchover to the standby exciter fails, a fault is indicated.
Automatic (Auto- Switches the automatic exciter switchover function on and off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
matic Switch)
Guard Time Shows the set checkout time which must elapse before switchover 1 s to 60 s Maintenance Yes
(Automatic to another exciter can take place. This can be used to make sure
Switch) that brief faults do not immediately cause a switchover. The Guard
Time is also effective in the "Multiple Switch" switch mode for the
switchback to the preselected exciter.
The setting can be changed here.
Switch Mode Determines the behavior after successfully switching over to a Single Switch, Maintenance Yes
(Automatic standby exciter. Single Switch: The automatic exciter switchover Multiple
Switch) selector remains fixed to the standby exciter until the "Recommand Switch
Selection" button is pressed. Multiple Switch: The automatic switch-
over automatically switches back to the preselected exciter as soon
as the standby exciter signals a fault and the preselected exciter is
operational again.
Automatic (Status) Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function is ready. Ready, Not Read only -
● Ready: The automatic switchover function is ready for opera- Ready
tion.
● Not Ready: The standby exciter is not ready for operation, the
transmitter is switched off, the automatic switchover function
has already switched over or there is a fault in the exciter
switch.
RF Switch Link Indicates whether there is a CAN bus connection to the exciter OK, Error Read only -
(Status) switches.
Preselected Out- Indicates how the two Output Stages A and B are to be interconnec- A+B -> Maintenance Yes
put Stage (Config) ted to each other. Antenna
The setting can be changed here. A+B -> Load
A -> Antenna,
B -> Load
A -> Load, B -
> Antenna
Active Output Indicates how the two Output Stages A and B are currently intercon- A+B -> Read only -
Stage (Config) nected to each other. Antenna
A+B -> Load
A -> Antenna,
B -> Load
A -> Load, B -
> Antenna
Exc A Loop Indicates whether the RF loop monitored by Exciter A is closed. Open, Closed Read only -
Exc B Loop Indicates whether the RF loop monitored by Exciter B is closed. Open, Closed Read only -
Set Value Indicates at which position the output stage switches are to be. Pos 1, Pos 2 Read only -
Curr. Value Indicates at which position the output stage switches currently are. Pos 1, Pos 2 Read only -
Status Indicates whether the output stage switch is working correctly. A OK, Not OK Read only -
warning is issued if the current value does not correspond to the set
value.
Automatic (Auto- Switches the output stage switchover function on and off. Off, On Maintenance Yes
matic Switch)
Guard Time Indicates the set checkout time which must elapse before an output 1 s to 60 s Maintenance Yes
(Automatic stage is removed from the signal path. This can be used to make
Switch) sure that brief faults do not cause a switchover. The Guard Time is
also effective in the "Multiple Switch" switch mode for the switch-
back to the preselected configuration of the output stages.
The setting can be changed here.
Switch Mode Determines the behavior after successfully removal of an output Single Switch, Maintenance Yes
(Automatic stage from the signal path. Single Switch: The output stage switch Multiple Switch
Switch) remains permanently fixed in the new position until either the config-
uration of the output stages is reset or until the "Reset Faults Trans-
mitter" button is pressed. Multiple Switch: The automatic switchover
function automatically switches the previously defective output stage
back into the signal path.
Automatic (Sta- Indicates whether the automatic output stage switchover function is Ready, Not Read only -
tus) ready. Ready
● Ready: The automatic switchover function is ready for opera-
tion.
● Not Ready: The transmitter is switched off, the automatic
switchover function has already switched over or there is a fault
in the exciter switches or the output stage switches.
RF Switch Link Indicates whether there is a CAN bus connection to the output stage OK, Error Read only -
(Status) switches.
Password: 1234
The editing options and a list of existing users are displayed.
3. Enter a user name and password and the desired permissions for this user.
The password must be at least 6 characters long.
2. From the list of existing users, select the user to be modified from the Select col-
umn.
For the default users, you can change the passwords only; you cannot change access
rights.
2. From the list of existing users, select the user to be deleted from the Select col-
umn.
To obtain information about existing sessions and to close active sessions, proceed as
follows:
3. From the list of existing sessions, select the session to be closed from the Select
column.
The user rights system can be used to restrict specific access options for users. To
prevent operator errors, rights should be assigned based on level of knowledge, abili-
ties and tasks of the individual users to be carried out.
The following user rights are predefined:
● Query
Users can view the state and all system settings but cannot make any changes.
● Operation
Users can also toggle between local and remote operation and switch the program
of a transmitter on/off.
● Maintenance
Users can also change settings that affect operational response and are required
for carrying out maintenance work. This includes changes to the settings of the
coder or loading a preset. Users with these access rights should have good knowl-
edge of the transmitter equipment since changes can cause errors in the transmit-
ter operation.
● Configuration
Users can also change system-specific settings necessary so that individual instru-
ments in the system can work together correctly. For example, this includes set-
tings in the "Basic Config" task. Users with these access rights should have very
good knowledge of how the 9000 transmitter family works. Changes to these set-
tings can sometimes only be reversed directly on-site with specialized expertise.
"Configuration" access rights are only required for the initial startup of modules, for
modifying existing transmitter systems and for changing IP addresses.
The rights for operation using the front panel and using a web browser can be
assigned to each user individually. Operation via a web browser requires a password
to be entered. The default password when a new user is created is always "1234". The
password can be changed by the administrator. The newly assigned password must be
at least 6 characters long.
As an option, it is possible to specify whether users need to enter a password to allow
operation using the touch display of the TDU900/901. If operation using the display is
to be protected from unauthorized access, a password requirement for logging into the
front panel must be defined for all users, with the exception of the two non‑deletable
users "Query" and "Operation".
Operation with the "Operation" access right using the front panel is usually possible
after starting the system. This right allows users to switch between local operation and
remote operation and switch the program of the transmitter on and off. If this operating
option is to be protected from unauthorized access, a password required for access via
the front panel must also be defined for the "Operation" user.
Meaning of LEDs
Fault (red) Fault for trans- Fault for trans- Fault for transmit-
mitter mitter ter
Input OK Sum input status Sum input status Sum input status
of the exciter is of the active of the active
OK exciter is OK [2] exciter is OK [2]
The graphical user interface (GUI) of the Tx9 transmitter series has been implemented
in JAVA to ensure optimum user experience. Java technology provides maximum com-
patibility between different versions of operating systems and web browsers.
Further information on the Java technology can be found in the appendix of the Tx9
user manual.
1. Create a physical network connection to the transmitter. The following options are
available:
a) Remote access via WAN (Wide Area Network)
b) Local access directly to a transmitter using a network cable
2. Start the web browser and enter the following information in the address bar:
a) IP address of the transmitter
The website for operating the transmitter is called (login page).
Remote control of the transmitter usually takes place via a network using a web
browser. To keep the loading times short when the connection to the transmitter is
being set up, the network connection between the web browser and the transmitter
should permit data rates of at least 1 Mbit/s.
If the network connection is considerably slower, the user interface can also be started
locally on a PC or notebook. If the narrowband GUI is used, an average data rate of at
least 38 kbit/s is recommended. Operation via a GSM modem with 9600 bit/s is also
possible; in this case, however, significant loading times are to be expected.
This requires a version of the user interface precisely matched to that of the transmitter
software, to be installed on the local PC. Each release of the transmitter software
includes a suitable narrowband GUI version in the form of a ZIP archive.
5.2.2.1 Installation
5.2.2.2 Operation
● After the launcher is started by double‑clicking the "startMe.jar" file, a login screen
is displayed.
● The IP address of the transmitter, a registered user name and the password must
then be entered.
● Clicking the "Logon" button opens another window in which the user interface of
the transmitter is displayed.
● Most of the functions provided for operation via a web browser are also available in
the user interface. Only the export/import of backups is not possible.
● Using the launcher, it is possible to open up to 5 windows simultaneously on the
same transmitter.
1 = Menu bar
2 = System status
3 = Path bar
4 = Working area
5.2.3.2 Views
The user interface provides two different views of the transmitter system:
● Device View
● Task View
Device View
In this view, all of the transmitter's functions are structured in the form of block dia-
grams. All parameters relevant to operation are accessible.
Task View
This view combines certain, frequently recurring tasks. A task includes exactly those
cross‑instrument parameters which are required for working on this task. All of the
parameters relevant to startup and maintenance are accessible.
All of the functions of a R&S TDU900/901 required for basic operation of a transmitter
are combined on the menu bar.
The following functions are available:
● Logbook
● Help
● Local/Remote
● Login/Logout
● Device View
● Task View.
Logbook
The logbook is used for logging all system events and for troubleshooting and error
analysis.
Help
This button is used to activate the help function. The following steps must be per-
formed:
Local/Remote
The transmitter can be operated via both local access and via remote access.
The Local/Remote button allows you to toggle between the two types of access.
The transmitter can be switched from remote operation to local operation at any time.
For safety reasons, remote operation is not possible if the system is currently being
operated locally.
The current status (L = Local, R = Remote) is shown directly on the Local/Remote but-
ton. The corresponding status of each transmitter is shown individually for multi‑trans-
mitter systems.
Login/Logout
The login dialog allows a user to log in or log out of the system.
To make changes to the system settings, the user with corresponding access rights
must be logged into the system.
The following access rights are predefined:
● Query
Users can view the state and all system settings but cannot make any changes.
● Operation
Users can also carry out certain operations, e.g. switching the program of a trans-
mitter on/off.
● Maintenance
Users can also change settings that affect operational response and are required
for carrying out maintenance work. This includes changes to the settings of the
coder or loading a preset. Users with these access rights should have good knowl-
edge of the transmitter equipment since changes can cause errors in the transmit-
ter operation.
● Configuration
Users can also change system-specific settings necessary so that individual instru-
ments in the system can work together correctly. For example, this includes set-
tings in the "Basic Config" task. Users with these access rights should have very
good knowledge of how the 9000 transmitter family works. Changes to these set-
tings can sometimes only be reversed directly on-site with specialized expertise.
"Configuration" access rights are only required for the initial startup of modules, for
modifying existing transmitter systems and for changing IP addresses.
Users and access rights are assigned via the web browser. See Chapter 4.7, "User
Administration", on page 293.
Initially a user with "Operation" or "Query" access rights is active when operating the
TDU900/901 using its display. Another user must be selected in the login dialog if set-
tings that require higher access rights are to be changed. If the administrator has
assigned a password to the selected user for operation using the front panel of the
TDU900/901, this password must be entered at this point.
For operation using a web browser, a corresponding user and password must be
specified during login. To change users, you first have to log out and then log in again
under a different user name.
Device View
This button is used to switch to the Device View.
Task View
This button is used to switch to the Task View.
5.2.3.4 Navigation
The Device View is used to navigate through the transmitter menus. Pressing one of
the visibly raised block diagram elements allows you to navigate further into the trans-
mitter structure. Parameters that may be spread out over multiple tabs are located on
the lowest menu level. A path bar is shown at the bottom of the screen.
This has two functions:
● Displaying the current menu level
● Returning to higher menu levels
Dieser Wert ist editierbar, hat aber in der aktuellen Konfiguration keine Wirkung.
●
Dieser Wert wurde geändert und noch nicht in einen Preset abgespeichert.
●
This value cannot be edited with the user rights currently in effect or the position of
the local/remote switch is incorrect.
5.2.3.6 Editors
All of the functions of a R&S TDU900/901 required for basic operation of a transmitter
are combined on the menu bar.
The following functions are available:
Numeric editor
The numeric editor features the following functions.
1 = By pressing one of these buttons, the value is changed directly in the display without the use of the enter
button.
2 = The value entered using the numeric keypad is accepted by the system by pressing this button.
3 = Pressing this button discards all of the changes made in this window and restores the original value.
Violating the allowed value ranges causes an error message to appear and disables
the input elements (Increase/Decrease/Enter).
Text editor
The text editor allows letters, digits and special characters to be entered.
Finding an error
There are two ways of locating an error:
● Block diagrams
You can use the traffic light signaling of the elements in the block diagrams to find
the cause of an error in just a few steps, as long as the error is currently active.
Valuable information about an error's cause and tips for correcting the error can be
displayed using the help function of the respective error message.
● Logbook
Complex error situations including behavior over time can be analyzed using the
logbook. The help function again provides a multitude of valuable information.
Managing users
User management is only accessible if the TDU900/901 is operated using a browser.
The following login must be selected for this purpose:
User name: Superuser
Password: 1234
For more details, see Chapter 4.7, "User Administration", on page 293.
5.2.3.8 Logbook
All system events are recorded in the logbook. The following functions are available for
simplifying troubleshooting and error analysis:
● Intelligent filtering
Events are intelligently prefiltered based on the context of the menu currently open.
● Chronological view
Events are shown in their chronological order. Associated events are marked
accordingly.
● Manual filters
Events or event groups can be chosen selectively with the help of specific criteria.
● Scroll function
Enables fast navigation in long event lists
● Export
Enables export of an event list to a connected PC.
Intelligent filtering
Depending on which menu is used to open the logbook, only events relevant in the
context of the respective menu are displayed. These filters significantly increase clarity
in the logbook.
● System overview:
Opening in the system overview: Shows all of the events affecting the core compo-
nents (e.g. cooling, N+1 automatic switchover) and the most important messages
from individual transmitters within the system for MultiTX and N+1 systems. All of
the detailed messages from the transmitter are shown for SingleTX systems as
well.
● Transmitter level:
Opening in a transmitter-specific menu: Shows in detail all of the events that affect
the respective transmitter (incl. exciter).
● Exciter level:
Shows in detail all of the events that affect the respective exciter.
A total of up to 500 events are logged in the logbook.
Chronological view
All of the event messages are listed here in strictly chronological order. The most
recent messages are always shown at the top of the list.
To improve readability, logically associated entries are grouped together using thread
markers. A thread begins with the message directly above a marker and ends with the
message below the next marker. The arrow on the left side of the marker indicates the
reading direction. The color of the marker is determined by the most critical message
within the thread.
Each entry consists of the following information:
● Alarm level
– Error
– Error no longer present/remedied
– Warning
– Warning no longer present
– Info
● Error message text
● System component (control, amplifier, exciter, etc.)
● Time
Clicking the logbook list opens a detail view of the clicked area (optimized for
touchscreens). A specific entry can now be opened here and examined more closely.
1 = Thread marker
2 = Click to open detail view
The filter function allows filtering of the messages according to the following criteria:
● Level filter:
The messages can be filtered selectively according to individual or multiple levels
(Info | Warning | Fault) at the same time by selecting/deselecting the checkboxes
"Show Infos", "Show Warnings" and "Show Faults".
Selecting the "Show open issues only" checkbox will cause only messages that are
still active to be displayed, i.e. messages that still have not been remedied.
● Component filter:
The messages can be filtered selectively according to individual or multiple system
components (System | Exciter A/B | Output Stage) at the same time by selecting/
deselecting the checkboxes.
● Options:
The following options are available:
– Clear Logbook:
"Clear Logbook" is used to completely delete the contents of the logbook.
– Restore Logbook:
"Restore Logbook" is used to restore the logbook after it has been inadvertently
deleted.
– Messages:
The "Messages" display shows the number of entries in the logbook.
– Close:
"Close" is used to close the entire filter function.
Scroll function
The scroll function enables navigation within a long event list and the selection and
detailed view of specific events.
1 = Scroll box
2 = Scroll thumb
3 = Entry up
4 = Page up
5 = Entry down
6 = Page down
Clicking inside the scroll box moves the scroll thumb directly to the corresponding posi-
tion.
Entry down: This button is used to scroll down by one entry in the direction of the
oldest date.
Entry up: This button is used to scroll up by one entry in the direction of the most
recent date.
Page down: This button is used to scroll by one page at a time in the direction of the
oldest date.
Page up: This button is used to scroll by one page at a time in the direction of the
most recent date.
Export
The logbook can be exported. When exported, two files with different formats are cre-
ated on the local file system of the operating computer.
The file with the extension .txt contains logbook entries in the csv format. This file can
be processed further using e.g. a spreadsheet program. The file with the exten-
sion .html contains the content of the logbook in a human‑readable format and can be
displayed by double‑clicking the file name in a web browser.
The storage location of the exported logbook files is predefined and cannot be
changed. The path used on the local file system is shown in the GUI underneath the
"Export Logbook" button.
Depending on the software version of the transmitter, the "Export Logbook" function is
either directly in the Logbook menu or in the "Filters/Options" submenu.
Intelligent filtering is always used during export. This means that precisely those events
which are shown in the logbook of the respective instrument are exported.
The directory path is always shown in English. If Windows has been switched over to a
different language variant, the subpath "Users" must be interpreted in the respective
local language.
6.1 Maintenance
● Backup/Restore
● Software Update
● Maintenance
6.1.1 Backup/Restore
Using the Backup/Restore function you can save the software and all settings of the
R&S TCE900/901 modules as a backup file and also read in the entire file again. The
backup file is saved to the flash card of the respective R&S TCE900/901 modules.
A backup can be read in only if the backup is valid (i.e. File Status is OK).
To start the Backup/Restore function, proceed as follows:
2. The following functions and displays are available in the Backup/Restore tab:
a) for Backup/Restore:
● Backup State
● Start Backup
● Start Restore
b) for File Info:
● File State
● Name
● Part Number
● Serial Number
● Device Name
● Host Name
● Date/Time
● SW/FW/Bios Number
When updating the software, it is important to observe the sequence in which the indi-
vidual R&S TCE900/901 updates are performed.
The R&S TCE900/901 exciters are updated in the first step and the R&S TCE900/901
system control in the second step.
TCE900 and TCE901 use different software packages.
● TCE900
– Material number of the software for ATV, DTV, DAB: 2109.3806.00
– Material number of the software for band 2: 2109.3858.00
● TCE901 Material number of the software: 2509.4806.00
2. The following functions and displays are available in the SW Update tab:
● Update Mode
● Current Version
● Software Update
● Firmware Update
● Device Name
● Device Group
6.1.3 Maintenance
● Reboot
If the instrument is rebooted, the software of the R&S TCE900/901 module is
restarted, after which it continues to run in the same operating mode.
● Cold Boot
With a cold boot, the R&S TCE900/901 module is restarted, after which it is in
an unconfigured state. The R&S TCE900/901 module must then be reconfig-
ured.
Cold Boot
With a cold boot, all settings are deleted, after which the R&S TCE900/901 is in an
unconfigured state.
6.1.4 Options
Deinstalling options
Options can be removed from a unit. This is done in the following way:
● Request a deactivation key from your local Rohde & Schwarz sales partner, speci-
fying the serial number of the key card and the K material number of the option to
be returned.
● Install the deactivation key in the Task View (Home) > Option > Manage Keys
menu.
● Return the option by sending the option key response to your local
Rohde & Schwarz sales partner.
Status (Install/ Indicates whether all SW options are functioning correctly. A yellow Ok, Warning, Read only -
Deinstall) lamp indicates that a temporary option will expire shortly. A red lamp Fault
indicates that a temporary option has expired.
Selected entry Indicates which deactivation key from a list of up to 23 keys is cur- Operation No
(Deactivations) rently being displayed. The list can be scrolled using the "Next
Entry" and "Previous Entry" buttons.
Option Key Num- Shows the K material number of the deactivated option. Read only -
ber (Deactiva-
tions)
Option Key Name Shows the name of the deactivated option. Read only -
(Deactivations)
Option Key Shows the acknowledgment key which confirms that an option has 30 characters Read only -
Response (Deacti- been deactivated.
vations) This key must be sent back to your local sales partner when an
option is returned.
If modules need to be replaced, a backup of the TCE901 configuration does not have
to be made beforehand because no specific settings are stored there.
Protect the operating site against electrostatic discharge in order to prevent damage to
the electronic components of the modules. Details can be found in the safety instruc-
tions given at the beginning of this manual and on the CD‑ROM.
7.2 Tools
● TORX 8 screwdriver
● TORX 10 screwdriver
● PH2 Phillips screwdriver
● Flat pliers
● Extraction tool for options and boards: 2113.8250.00
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove all 24 screws from the instrument cover (TX 8 Torx screwdriver).
1. Position the instrument cover on the TCE901 so that the cutout is at the LEDs.
1 = Cutout
2 = LEDs
2. Secure the instrument cover using the 24 screws (TX 8 Torx screwdriver).
1 = Slot A
2 = Slot B
3 = Slot C
The equipment configuration shown here is intended as an example and may differ
depending on the specific purpose of your instrument.
Required tools
To remove this module, you will need the extraction tool R&S No. 2113.8250.00 (see
Figure 7-9).
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
4. Insert the extraction tool into the two cutouts in the option board and pull out the
option board.
5. To remove the extraction tool from the option board, push the two arms outward
and pull the tool out of the option board.
1 = Connector
2 = Guides for option board
3. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
It is important to wear ESD gloves and an ESD armband when working on the inside of
the instrument
The exciter/gap filler module consists of the exciter/gap filler board, IPM2/4 module,
the EMI filter SUB-D 15 pole circuit board and the exciter/gap filler rear panel.
The exciter/gap filler module must be removed from the instrument if the exciter/gap
filler board and the IPS2 module are to be replaced.
Overview
The flash memory card is on the IPS2 controller (see "Overview" on page 326).
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
3. Remove the option boards (if present) from slots A and B (see Chapter 7.4,
"Replacing Option Boards", on page 320).
4. Undo the fastening clips of the flash memory card; the flash memory card then
folds up.
The new flash memory card (R&S No. 2509.4170.00) is delivered with preinstalled
operating system and firmware.
After the new flash memory card is inserted, the TCE901 is in an unconfigured state. If
a backup is available, the original instrument settings can be loaded.
Otherwise the TCE901 must be reconfigured, as described in the instrument manual
(2509.4141.03).
1. Insert the flash memory card into the slot and then push the flash memory card
down until it engages on both sides.
2. Reinstall the option boards (if present) (see Chapter 7.4.2, "Installing Option Board
(Example: AirCooling Interface)", on page 323).
3. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Closing TCE901
Instrument Cover", on page 319).
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
The slot for the chip card is on the exciter/gap filler board (see "Overview"
on page 326).
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
3. Remove the option boards (if present) from slots A and B (see Chapter 7.4,
"Replacing Option Boards", on page 320).
4. Release the chip card holder by sliding back the silver holder lock.
The chip card can now be folded upward and removed.
Do not touch the contacts of the chip card and chip card reader!
Clean the contacts of the chip card and chip card reader using isopropanol (IPA). Do
not touch the contacts again after cleaning them.
2. Reinstall the option boards (if present) (see Chapter 7.4.2, "Installing Option Board
(Example: AirCooling Interface)", on page 323).
3. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Closing TCE901
Instrument Cover", on page 319).
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
The lithium battery is on the IPS2 controller (see "Overview" on page 326).
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
3. Remove the option boards (if present) from slots A and B (see Chapter 7.4,
"Replacing Option Boards", on page 320).
4. Carefully pry the lithium battery out of the holder (using a 4 mm flat‑head screw-
driver or tweezers).
1. Slide the lithium battery under the spring into the holder.
Note: The positive terminal (+) of the lithium battery must face upward.
2. Reinstall the option boards (if present) (see Chapter 7.4.2, "Installing Option Board
(Example: AirCooling Interface)", on page 323).
3. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Closing TCE901
Instrument Cover", on page 319).
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Open the fuse holder cover on the rear panel of the TCE901.
To remove the fuse holder, it must be released on the right and left side (flat‑head
screwdriver or tweezers).
1 = Fuse holder
3. Pull out the fuse holder with the 2 fuses and remove the defective fuses.
Check the fuses using a continuity tester or multimeter.
1 = Fuse holder
2 = Fuses
1 = Fuses
2 = Fuse holder
1 = Fuse holder
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
3. Undo the 2 fastening screws of the power supply unit on the underside of the
TCE901 (TX 10 Torx screwdriver).
Figure 7-25: Fastening screws of TDK Lambda HWS150A‑12 power supply unit
5. Lift the power supply unit out of the housing and remove the 3 power input cables
of the power supply unit (PH2 Phillips screwdriver).
6. Remove the power output cables from the power supply unit (PH2 Phillips screw-
driver).
a) Undo the 2 screws of the power supply unit cover (TX 10 Torx screwdriver).
Figure 7-30: Power supply unit TDK Lambda HWS150A‑12 and power supply unit cover
Figure 7-31: Power supply unit cover with intact and full insulating film covering (insulating film
shown here in red)
1. Before attaching the power supply unit cover, remove the two sheet metal bridges
from the TDK Lambda HWS150A‑12 power supply unit.
Figure 7-32: Removing both sheet metal bridges from TDK Lambda HWS150‑12
2. Position the power supply unit cover on the TDK Lambda HWS150A‐12 power sup-
ply unit.
Secure the power supply unit cover on the power supply unit using 2 screws
(TX 10 Torx screwdriver).
3. Attach the power output cables to the power supply unit (PH2 Phillips screwdriver).
4. Connect the power input cables to the power supply unit (PH2 Phillips screw-
driver).
5. CAUTION! Risk of damage to the power input cables of the power supply unit. Dur-
ing installation, make sure that the power input cables of the power supply unit are
not trapped under the power supply unit.
Place the power supply unit in the housing and reconnect the connector.
1 = Connector
2 = Power input cables of power supply unit
6. Secure the power supply unit using the 2 fastening screws on the underside of the
TCE901 (TX 10 Torx screwdriver).
Figure 7-38: Fastening screws of TDK Lambda HWS150A‑12 power supply unit
7. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Closing TCE901
Instrument Cover", on page 319).
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
3. Remove the option board (if present) from slot A (see Chapter 7.4, "Replacing
Option Boards", on page 320).
5. Remove the 3 cable ties and disconnect the plug of the defective fan from the
backplane.
1 = Fans
2 = Fan plugs
3 = Cable ties
1. Move the fan to the installation position. The fan cable must be pulled through the
fan frame into the housing.
1 = Fans
2 = Fan plugs
3 = Cable ties
4. Reinstall the option board (if present) (see Chapter 7.4.2, "Installing Option Board
(Example: AirCooling Interface)", on page 323).
5. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Closing TCE901
Instrument Cover", on page 319).
After replacing the fans, check that they run without any mechanically generated back-
ground noise.
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
The capacitor backup battery is inside the TCE901, at the front right of the housing.
1. Switch off the TCE901 and disconnect it from the supply voltage.
2. Remove the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3, "Opening and Clos-
ing TCE901", on page 318).
b) Lift the capacitor backup battery out of the housing and disconnect the connec-
tor.
b) Place the capacitor backup battery in the housing and secure the capacitor
backup battery using the 4 screws (TX 10 Torx screwdriver).
2. Attach the instrument cover of the TCE901 (see Chapter 7.3.2, "Closing TCE901
Instrument Cover", on page 319).
After exchanging the module, the correct functionality of the TCE901 unit must be
checked in the transmitter system.
If there are still problems, contact the transmitter support of Rohde&Schwarz.
Annex
A R&S TCE901 Interface Description
Data 2- X11.1
Data 2+ X11.2
Data 4- X11.4
Data 4+ X11.5
V-Sync X11.8
Data 1- X11.9
Data 1+ X11.10
Data 3- X11.12
Data 3+ X11.13
+5 V X11.14
GND X11.15
Hotplug-Detect X11.16
Data 0- X11.17
Data 0+ X11.18
Data 5- X11.20
Data 5+ X11.21
Clock + X11.23
Clock - X11.24
Red X11.C1
Green X11.C2
Blue X11.C3
H-Sync X11.C4
GND X11.C5
USB A connector
USB A connector
A.1.4.1 X6 TX
n.c. X47.6
A.3.1.3 X69 – RF IN
B Circuit Documents
RF MONITOR
A A
REF MON
1PPS IN
100....240V AC 50/60 Hz
GPS IN
RF OUT
LAN REMOTE
DEMOD1
REF IN
DEMOD2
TS2 IN
TS1 IN
TS LAN 2
TS LAN 1
3.15A IEC 60127-2/5 T3.15H
DVI -D
L1 L2/N PE
TX IF
USB
USB
X66
SMA
TX
X61
SMA
X60
QMA
X67
QMA
X1.
X83 X6 X24 X64 X23 X68 X31 X30 X22 X21 X20 X7 X14 X15 X2 X11 X12
A83F A6F
L N PE X84 X5 m SATA
A11 W17
B B
A2 CPU
OPTION
SLOT C
OPTION
SLOT B
OPTION
SLOT A
L1 L2/N (IPS)
EXCITER BOARD
W6 X6
RF OUT X60 W60
W1
RF MON X61 W61
W66
GPS IN X66
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
W67
DEMOD1 X67
A3 S700 LOCAL
BACKPLANE S701 ON
+12V/GND X3 LAN LOCAL
X112 X126 X48 X200
FRONT
W200
X200
D W12 D
A10 OPTION
A4 CAPACITOR
POWER SUPPLY BACKUP
BATTERY
W1 L +S
N -S
PE/FG +V
-V
E
E E
E2 E1
FAN2 FAN1
TCE901 Datum:
Date: 2016-02-03
Abteilung:
Dept.: 7TA2
Name:
Name: Thoma 2509.4106.01 S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R&S®TCE901 Spare Parts Lists
*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG
+EXPLANATION OF VARIANTS
*VAR02=GRUNDGERÄT
+VAR02=BASIC UNIT
*VAR11=SKD KABELSATZ
+VAR11=SKD SET OF CABLES
*VAR12=SKD MECHANISCHE
KOMPONENTEN
+VAR12=SKD MECHANICAL
COMPONENTS
*VAR14=SKD ELEKTRISCHE
KOMPONENTEN
+VAR14=SKD ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
*VAR15=SKD SEPARATE TEILE
+VAR15=SKD SEPARATE PARTS
*VAR16=SKD INVENTAR
+VAR16=SKD INVENTORY
50 0 S PH BEMERKUNG 0999.9610.00 B O
NOTE
Spare Parts List for 2509.4106.01 TCE901
EXCITER
VAR 02 14
##verwendet in / used in:
Printed documents are not subject to revision
##2509.4106.01
For this document all rights are reserved.
_ ##2509.4106.01
VAR 02 14
Einbau in / installation into:
A11 - IPS2
RF DEMOD1 CABLE
VAR 02 11
##verwendet in / used in:
##2509.4106.01
VAR 02 14
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
VAR 02 12
For this document all rights are reserved.
A A
1:5
B B
600
C C
1:5
NX
110
120
D D
640
630
Refer to protection notice ISO 16016.
Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 beachten.
230
E 240 E
150
160
G 170 G
Maßeinheit
Measuring
Unit
[mm]
Projektions-
dargestellt: VAR02
methode
Projection
Method
200
RoHS 2011/65/EU
H H
Maßstab Toleranz Werkstoff
Scale 1:2(1:5) Tol. Material
Benennung / Designation Sprache / Lang. Aei. / C.I. Blatt / Sh.
ISO TCE901
Datum
Date 2016-12-22
Abteilung
Dept. 7TT1
Name
Name Ju 2509.4129.01 D
A2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NX
Optionsabhängige Montage des Exciterboards 2507.2229.02
A 310 320 300 A
C C
301.1 301.2
D D
Maßeinheit
Measuring
Unit
[mm]
E E
Projektions-
methode
Projection
Method
RoHS 2011/65/EU